Yamaha Clavinova CLP-990 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: Clavinova CLP-990

Categorie: Digitale piano's

Type: Handleiding

CLP-990

Owner’s manual

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage

matches the voltage specified on the name

plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a

voltage selector may be provided on the bottom

panel of the main keyboard unit near the power

cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set

for the voltage in your area. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”

screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that

the correct voltage appears next to the pointer

on the panel.

CLP-990M

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-990/990M

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-469

CLP-990

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even

death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The

instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use

immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on

it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of

the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the

power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name

plate of the instrument.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an

electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.

(1) B-6

CLP-990

PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend

or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk

on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the

cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower

sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time,

or during electrical storms.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components.

Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set

the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing

the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sun-

light, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to

the internal components.

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this

might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents,

cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on

the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the

buttons, switches or connectors.

• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in the key cover

gap.

• Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard.

If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the

instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause

inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the

instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this

can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-

sician.

(1) B-6

CLP-990

PRECAUTIONS

■

USING THE BENCH (If included)

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose

might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the

included tool.

■

SAVING USER DATA

• Always save data to a ﬂoppy disk or an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 fre-

quently, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument,

or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Speaker box

Key cover

When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the instrument and the handles

located on the rear.

Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or

personal injury.

(1) B-6

CLP-990

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-990/990M. In order to make the most of

your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual

thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet

This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also,

a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided.

Introduction:

Please read this section ﬁrst. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on

page 16, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations.

Basic Operation:

This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you

play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to

the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97, or the “Index”

on page 106.

Detailed Settings:

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.

Refer to this section as necessary.

Appendix:

This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference

material.

Reference Booklet:

XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

* The models CLP-990M will be referred to as the CLP-990 in this Owner’s Manual.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and

may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser’s personal use is pro-

hibited.

■

Trademarks

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what

you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system

(the manual is not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in English) at

the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library

(Electronic Musical Instruments)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

CLP-990

Table of contents

Introduction.......................................................... 2

PRECAUTIONS........................................................................................................................................ 3

About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6

Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7

Application Index

Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. .............................. 11

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk ...................................................................... 13

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 14

Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 15

Features ................................................................................................................................................ 16

Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 18

Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18

Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 18

Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 19

Adjusting the display contrast...................................................................................................................................... 20

Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 20

Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 20

Basic Operation .................................................. 21

Part Names........................................................................................................................................... 22

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 24

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 26

Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 26

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs....................................................................................................... 28

Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 30

Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 30

Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 31

Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 32

Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 34

Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 35

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 37

Using the metronome................................................................................................................................................... 40

Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 41

Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 41

Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 41

Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 43

Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 44

Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 45

Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 46

Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 46

Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 46

CLP-990

Table of contents

Changing a voice or tempo after recording........................................................................................................... 47

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 48

Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 49

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]...................................................................... 50

Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 50

Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 51

Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 52

Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] .................................................................................. 53

Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong]......................................................... 53

Renaming a song...[RenameSong]............................................................................................................................... 54

Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] .................................................................................... 55

Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] .................................................................................................................... 56

Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 56

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 57

Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 57

Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 59

Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59

Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 61

Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 61

Connecting a personal computer................................................................................................................................. 63

Detailed Settings ................................................ 69

Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 70

Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 70

Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 72

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 74

Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 74

Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay]...................................... 75

Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 75

Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 75

Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 75

Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] ................................................................... 76

Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 76

Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]........................................................ 77

Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 77

Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 77

Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 77

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING].............................................................................. 78

Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 78

Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 78

Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 79

Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune]................................................................................................. 79

Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType]....................................................................................................................... 79

Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]*...................................................................................................................... 79

CLP-990

Table of contents

Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 80

Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 80

Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 80

Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 80

Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 81

Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 81

Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 81

Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 82

Setting the left pedal function [LPedal]....................................................................................................................... 82

Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 82

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 83

About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 83

Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 84

Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 84

Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 85

Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 85

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 85

Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 85

Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 86

Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 86

Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup]...................................................................................... 86

Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 86

Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 87

Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 87

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 87

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]............................................................................... 87

Selecting a scale [Scale]................................................................................................................................................. 88

Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 88

Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 88

Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 89

Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone

[VibraphonePedalMode].............................................................................................................................................. 89

Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 89

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 89

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 90

Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 90

Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 90

Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 91

Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 91

Other method for restoring the normal settings......................................................................................................... 91

Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 92

Questions about Operations and Functions........................................................................................97

CLP-990

Table of contents

Appendix ............................................................ 99

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 100

Data Compatibility............................................................................................................................. 101

Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 103

Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 105

Index................................................................................................................................................... 106

CLP-990

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application

and situation.

Listening

Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24

“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26

Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24

Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26

Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 41

“Playing back a song” on page 57

Listening to songs in a ﬂoppy disk............................................................. “Playing back a song” on page 57

Playing

Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 31

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 34

Changing tonal color

Viewing the list of voices................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 103

Simulating a concert hall...........................................................................................“[REVERB]” on page 33

Combining two voices..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 35

Playing different sounds with left and right hands

...........................“Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 37

Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 32

Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 33

Practicing

Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 28

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 40

Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 41

“Turning track playback on and off” on page 59

Recording

Recording your performance......................................................“Recording Your Performance” on page 41

Saving recorded songs to ﬂoppy disks or memory

...........................................................“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 50

CLP-990

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.

Settings

Making detailed settings for recording and playback

............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 74

Making detailed settings for the metronome

......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 77

Making detailed settings for the voices

................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 78

Making detailed settings for MIDI ....................................................“MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83

Making detailed settings for the Clavinova.........................................................“Other settings” on page 87

Connecting the Clavinova to other devices

What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83

Recording your performance.....................................................“AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61

Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61

Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova.......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 62

Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63

Quick solution

What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11

“Features” on page 16

Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 23

Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting

................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 91

Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 92

If you have questions about operations and functions

..............................................................................“Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97

Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 100

CLP-990

Handling the Floppy Disk

Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk

Precautions

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible Disk Type

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

To insert a ﬂoppy disk into the disk drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and

the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot.

Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the

way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a ﬂoppy disk:

Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conﬁrm that the ﬂoppy

disk drive is stopped. If the disk drive is operating (during

the [SaveToDisk] (P53), [DeleteSong] (P53), [RenameSong]

(P54), [CopyDisk] (P55), or [FormatDisk] (P56) opera-

tion), the Clavinova displays [Executing].

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

when the disk drive is operating. Doing so can damage the

disk and possibly the disk drive.

Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will

automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, care-

fully remove it by hand.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly.

The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed posi-

tion with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few

millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the

partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can

damage the disk drive mechanism or the ﬂoppy disk. To

remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button

once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then

repeat the eject procedure.

Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive before

turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the drive for

extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can

cause data read and write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually

cause read and write errors.

• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-

able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about

once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-

ability of proper head-cleaning disks.

• Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive.

Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or

ﬂoppy disks.

Eject button

14 CLP-990

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk

About the Floppy Disks

• To handle ﬂoppy disks with care:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy disks

in their protective cases when they are not in use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high

or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-

uids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on

the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to

a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in

the proper location.

• To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab

open).

• Data backup

• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you keep two copies of important data on separate ﬂoppy

disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or dam-

aged. To make a backup disk use the Copy Disk function

on page 55.

Maintenance

Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well).

Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber

products on the instrument.

Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded.

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it

is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you ﬁrst open the package. Transport the

keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like.

write-protect tab open

(protect position)

CLP-990 15

Included Accessories

“50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection

Owner’s Manual

Reference Booklet

Recording disk

Save your recorded performance to this disk. (page 53)

Bench

(included or optional depending on locale)

CLP-990

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

AUX PEDAL

MIDI

OUTIN THRU

L/L

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

TO HOST

A set of standard

stereo headphones

can be plugged in

here for private

practice. (page 20)

Connect an optional

pedal here and assign

one of the various

functions to the pedal.

(page 62)

These jacks allow you to connect an

external tone generator to reproduce

the sound via the Clavinova’s

internal sound system and speakers.

(page 62)

Connect a MIDI device here to

use various MIDI functions.

(page 63, 66)

(About MIDI—page 83)

Connect recording equipment

(such as a cassette tape

recorder) here to record your

performance. (page 61)

This jack and selector switch

allow direct connection to a

personal computer for

sequencing and other music

applications. (page 62-67)

PHONES

Features

The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-990 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playabil-

ity as well as Yamaha’s original “

AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

” tone generation technology for rich, musical

voices, and a special “

NL Keyboard (Natural Keyboard)

” that uses wooden keys with a new action mechanism for

improved continuous key response. The CLP-990 GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly

recorded from each key of a full concert grand piano. The CLP-990 GrandPiano1 voice features ﬁve velocity-

switched samples (

Dynamic Sampling

), a “

Soundboard Reverb

” (page 33) effect that accurately simulates the reso-

nance of a piano soundboard, “

String Resonance

” (page 88) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “

Sus-

tain Sampling

” (page 88)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings

when the damper pedal is pressed, and “

Key-off Samples

” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are

released. The CLP-990 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano.

CLP-990 17

Features

[OTHER SETTING]

Fine-tune the touch response

and pitch, etc. (page 87)

The Clavinova includes 50 preset

songs.

This section enables you to listen to

these songs, practice using a

convenient practice function, play back

Clavinova music data (sold in music

stores), and record and play back your

performance. (page 26, 41, 57)

The display allows

accurate control

and operation.

(page 23)

[MIDI SETTING]

Make detailed MIDI

settings, such as MIDI

receive/transmit

channels. (page 83)

[FILE]

Save recorded songs and

manage song files. (page 50)

MAIN voice gruop buttons

Select voices from 25 internal sounds

including Grand Piano 1. (page 30)

You can also combine two voices at a

time. (page 35)

[DEMO]

Demonstration playback

is available for each

voice. (page 24)

[METRONOME]

Use the

metronome

functions.

(page 40)

[CONTRAST]

Adjust the

brightness of

the display

using this

control.

(page 20)

[REVERB]/

[CHORUS]

Add reverb

(reverberation) and

spread (chorus) to

the sound.

(page 33)

[MASTER

VOLUME]

Adjust the

volume level

using this

slider.

(page 20)

[SONG SETTING]

Make detailed

settings for song

recording and

playback. (page 74)

[EXIT]

The screen returns to

its main display when

you press this button.

(page 23)

TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ]

You can shift the pitch

of the entire keyboard

up or down so that the

pitch will match that of

another instrument or

singer, while you play

the same keys.

(page 34)

TEMPO [DOWN]

[UP]

You can change the

song tempo

(speed).

(page 27, 40, 42, 58)

[VOICE

SETTING]

You can make

detailed settings

for tone and

effects.

(page 78)

BRILLIANCE

[ ] [ ]

Adjust the

brightness of

the tone using

these buttons.

(page 32)

LEFT voice group buttons/

[SPLIT POINT]

You can play different voices on

the left- and right-hand sections of

the keyboard. (page 37)

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-990

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CLP-990

Before Using the Clavinova

Key cover

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the

cover over the keys.

Adjusting the music stand angle

Changing the angle

Grasp the bottom of the stand and lift the stand while pulling it toward you. The stand locks at various angles

when you hear a click .

Replacing the stand to its original position

Raise the bottom of the stand until the stand becomes horizontal. Then lower the stand while supporting the

bottom.

Be careful to avoid catching your fingers

when opening or closing the cover.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be

careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit.

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key

cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could

cause electric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

Be careful not to pinch your fngers!

• When you adjust the music stand angle, be sure to hold the bottom

part, not the upper part or the sides. Use caution not to pinch any-

one’s ﬁngers, especially those of young children, between the

stand and the unit.

• Do not adjust the angle with sheet music or other objects resting on

the stand. Otherwise, the objects may fall and cause injury.

• Do not place heavy objects on the music stand. Doing so may dam-

age the music stand, or may cause injury.

CLP-990

Before Using the Clavinova

Turning the power on

1. Connect the power cable.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of

the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in

your area.

WARNING!

Make sure your CLP-990 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the

name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard

unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong

AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-990. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, con-

tact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-990 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In

some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify

the plug provided with the CLP-990. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed electrician.

2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.

• The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indica-

tor located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

Power indicator

If you close the key cover

without turning the power

off, the power indicator

remains lit, indicating that

the power is still on.

Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.

• The screen and the power indicator turn off.

The power connector is located on the lower part of the

rear panel.

(The shape of plug differs

depending on locale.)

TIP

Power indicator

[POWER] switch

A B

C D

NO YES

When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name

appears on the screen.

CLP-990

Before Using the Clavinova

Adjusting the display contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.

CONTRAST:

difference between bright-

ness and darkness

Setting the volume

While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of

the front panel to the left or right.

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the

entire keyboard sound

You can also adjust the

[PHONES] output level and

the AUX IN input level using

the [MASTER VOLUME]

slider.

Using headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to

one of the [PHONES] jacks. When

the headphones are plugged into

either of the [PHONES] jacks, the

internal speaker system is automat-

ically shut off.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.

Two sets of standard stereo head-

phones can be plugged in. (If you

are using only one pair of head-

phones, you can plug them into

either of these jacks.)

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

CONTRAST

EXIT

Use this knob.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

The level decreases. The level increases.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

Do not use the Clavinova at

a high volume level for a

long period of time, or your

hearing may be damaged.

PHONES

standard stereo phone plug

bottom surface

Optional headphones

HPE-160 Yamaha head-

phones.

TIP

21 CLP-990

Basic Operation

CLP-990 21

22 CLP-990

Part Names

Center “C”

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-990

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

PHONES

C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4

C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

B-1A-1

]

3 5

L M O

G I J K N P

7 B

4 6 0 A

9 C

Top panel

[POWER]..............................................P19

2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P20

3 [DEMO] ...............................................P24

4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P34

5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P26, 41, 57

6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P48

7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] /

[EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 59

8 [FILE] ...................................................P50

9 SONG [STOP] /

[START/PAUSE] .......................P26, 42, 58

0 [REC]....................................................P42

A [SONG SETTING] ................................P74

B METRONOME [START/STOP] /

[SETTING]......................................P40, 77

C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P27, 40, 42, 58

D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] /

C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P23

E LCD screen ..........................................P23

F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P20

G [EXIT]...................................................P23

H Voice group buttons for the MAIN

section.................................................P30

I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P38

J Voice group buttons for the LEFT

section.................................................P37

K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P78

L [REVERB]..............................................P33

M [CHORUS]............................................P33

N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P32

O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P83

P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P87

Q [PHONES] ............................................P20

R Soft pedal............................................P31

S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P31

T Damper pedal .....................................P31

CLP-990 23

AUX PEDAL

MIDI

OUTIN THRU

L/L

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

TO HOST

Part Names

Connectors

D LCD buttons

E LCD

Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD.

Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A

voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit.

G[EXIT] button

When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the

screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is

turned on).

U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P61

V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P62

W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P62

X [TO HOST] ..........................................P62

Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P62

Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P63

Floppy disk drive.................................P13

]

Panel logos

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI

standard which guarantees that any data conform-

ing to the standard will play accurately on any

GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer

from any manufacturer.

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI speciﬁcation which sig-

niﬁcantly expands and improves on the “GM Sys-

tem Level 1” standard with greater voice handling

capacity, expressive control, and effect capability

while retaining full compatibility with GM.

uppee left

on the front

board

A B

C D

NO YES

24 CLP-990

Listening to the Demonstration

Tunes

The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups.

Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs.

Demonstration tunes

Procedure

Mode:

A mode is a status under

which you can execute a

certain function. In demo

mode, you can play back

demonstration tunes.

1. Engage the demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.

The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in

sequence.

To adjust the volume level of

the demo songs, use the

[MASTER VOLUME] slider.

2. Select a tune and start playback.

Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired

demonstration tune.

The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback

starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played

repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO

→

E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN →

STRINGS/CHOIR).

Voice group Tunes Composer

PIANO

E.PIANO/BASS

HARPSICHORD

MALLET

ORGAN

STRINGS/CHOIR

Chanson de l’adieu

Original

Le Coucou

Original

Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2

Original

F.F. Chopin

–

L.C. Daguin

–

G.F. Händel

–

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 4

2 3

MAIN voice

group buttons

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

NOTE

CLP-990 25

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

3. Stop the playback.

Press the button of the voice group being played or the

[STOP] button.

4. Exit from demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo

mode.

26 CLP-990

Listening to 50 Piano Preset

Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 26) or

use them for practice (page 28). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains

the scores for 50 piano preset songs.

Playing the 50 piano preset songs

Procedure

Song:

On the Clavinova, perfor-

mance data is called a

“Song.” This includes dem-

onstration tunes and piano

preset tunes.

1. Select a song.

Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to

select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050.

You can play the keyboard

along with the preset song

playback. You can change the

voice playing on the keyboard.

2. Play a preset song.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

METRONOME [START/STOP]

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

The song number appears on the display.

Song select screen

TIP

• You can also use the C

[–]/[+] buttons to select a

song after pressing the

[SONG SELECT] button.

• [P-000: NewSong] is a

blank song provided for

you to record your perfor-

mance. (See page 41.)

• Use the SongRepeat

parameter in the “SONG

SETTING” menu to

select repeat playback of

all songs or repeat play-

back of a single song.

(See page 76.)

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

the number of measures

CLP-990 27

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Adjusting the tempo

You can also use the D[–]/[+]

buttons to change the tempo.

Resetting the tempo

Whenever you select a new

preset song, the tempo is

automatically reset to the

song’s original value.

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when

you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

3. Stop the song playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

Fast forward and rewind

You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:

• Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast for-

ward) through the song while the song is played or stopped.

• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to

restart playback from the top of the song.

• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start

playback from the next song.

• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is

stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song.

Default screen:

The default screen is a voice

select screen (page 30) that

appears when you turn on

the power to the Clavinova.

4. Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

TIP

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

TERMINOLOGY

28 CLP-990

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and

right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)

on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2].

procedure

You can turn parts on or off,

even during playback.

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or

[TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indica-

tors light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you

press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding but-

ton indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted.

Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the

part you just turned off.

Synchro:

Synchronous;occurring at the

same time

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the

keyboard (Synchro Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This

is called the “Synchro Start” function.

To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the

[STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/

PAUSE] indicator ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while

the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-990 29

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

3. Stop playback.

Resetting the part play-

back

Both parts are automatically

turned ON whenever you

select a new song.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle

of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by

pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press

the button.

TIP

You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to

the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 75.

30 CLP-990

Selecting and Playing Voices

Selecting Voices

Procedure

To learn characteristics of

the voices, listen to demo

songs for each voice group

(page 24). Refer to “Preset

Voice List” on page 103 for

more information on charac-

teristics of each preset voice.

1. Select a voice group.

Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row).

Voice

On the Clavinova, a voice

means “tone” or “tonal color.”

You can control the loudness

of a voice by how hard you

play the keyboard, although

different playing styles (touch

sensitivities) have little or no

effect with the sound of cer-

tain musical instruments.

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on

page 103.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

MAIN voice

group buttons

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name

PIANO

GrandPiano1

MALLET

Vibraphone

GrandPiano2 Marimba

E.PIANO/

BASS

E.Piano1 Celesta

E.Piano2

ORGAN

PipeOrganPrincipal

SynthPiano PipeOrganFlute1

WoodBass PipeOrganFlute2

ElectricBass PipeOrganTutti

Bass&Cymbal JazzOrgan

HARPSI-

CHORD

Harpsichord8'

STRINGS/

CHOIR

Strings

Harpsichord8'+4' SynthStrings

ElectricClavichord SlowStrings

Choir

SlowChoir

Scat

CLP-990 31

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the pedals

The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto

pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive

effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

If the damper pedal doesn’t

work, or notes are sustained

even when the pedal is not

pressed, make sure that the

RPedal parameter in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu is

set to ON (see page 81).

Damper (right) pedal

When you press the damper pedal, the notes

you play have a longer sustain.

When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the

damper pedal activates the instrument’s special

“Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the

unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s

soundboard and strings.

You can adjust the depth of

the resonance produced by

the “Sustain Samples” using

the Sustain Sampling Depth

parameter in the “OTHER

SETTING” menu. (See page

88.)

Sostenuto (center) pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard

and press the sostenuto pedal while holding

the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as

the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will

not sustain.

You can assign a function to

each pedal via the “R

Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L

Pedal” parameters in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu.

(See page 81, 82.)

The center and left pedals

can also be assigned to

song start/stop operation

(START/PAUSE function) via

the “PedalStart/Pause”

parameter in the “OTHER

SETTING” menu (on page

89).

Soft pedal (left)

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes

played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are

already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you

play the target notes.)

With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and

off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 82.)

TIP

When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you

play before you release the

pedal have a longer sustain.

TIP

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note(s), the notes will sustain

as long as you hold the pedal.

TIP

32 CLP-990

Selecting and Playing Voices

Adding variation to the sound

[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]

The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance,

Reverb, and Chorus.

[BRILLIANCE]

You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference.

Procedure

You can also use the D [–]/

[+] buttons after you press

one of the [BRILLIANCE]

buttons to select the desired

option.

Normal setting = Normal

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers

to the default setting (factory

setting) obtained when you

ﬁrst turn on the power to the

Clavinova.

If you select [Bright] or

[Metallic] as the type of bril-

liance, the volume level will

increase slightly. Under this

condition, if you raise the

[MASTER VOLUME] slider

setting, the sound may

become distorted. In this

case, lower the volume

accordingly.

Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the

desired tonality.

Dark.................... Dark tone

Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone

Normal ............... Standard tone

Bright ................. Bright tone

Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[REVERB] [CHORUS]

BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ]

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 33

Selecting and Playing Voices

[REVERB]

This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall.

Procedure

You can select a reverb type

via the Reverb Type param-

eter in the “VOICE SET-

TING” menu, and adjust the

reverb depth for the selected

voice via the Reverb Send

parameter. (See page 79.)

Normal setting = ON

Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb

on and off.

Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect

will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is

selected.

[CHORUS]

This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.

Procedure

You can select a chorus type

via the Chorus Type param-

eter in the “VOICE SET-

TING” menu, and adjust the

chorus depth for the

selected voice via the

Reverb Send parameter. You

can also turn chorus on or

off via the Chorus On Off

parameter. (See page 80.)

Normal Setting

The normal chorus on/off

setting is different for each

voice.

Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the cho-

rus on and off.

You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS]

ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off

parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 80). The [CHO-

RUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if

you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is

cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each

voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is auto-

matically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.

TIP

34 CLP-990

Selecting and Playing Voices

Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in

semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the

keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to

“5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavi-

nova will transpose it to the key of F.

You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance.

Procedure

Transpose:

Changing the key signature

of a song. On the Clavinova,

transposing shifts the pitch

of the entire keyboard.

1. Display the Transpose screen.

Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons.

2. Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song.

Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song.

Manual ............... Your manual performance

Song .................... Playback song

The transposition range is

from “–12 semitones” (down

one octave) through “0” (nor-

mal pitch) to “12 semitones”

(up one octave).

3. Set the transposition amount.

Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons

to set the transposition amount.

To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] but-

tons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously.

4. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

21 3 3

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-990 35

Selecting and Playing Voices

Combining two voices (Dual mode)

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate

a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Exam-

ples (Dual and Split)” on page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Dual mode using voices in different voice groups

Procedure

1. Enter Dual mode.

Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simulta-

neously.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a

voice.

The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 103

are called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd

voices.

3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any MAIN voice group button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 32

2 3 1 4

MAIN voice

The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps

The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps

group buttons

in Dual mode using voices from different groups.

in Dual mode using voices from the same group.

MAIN voice

group buttons

A B

C D

NO YES

1st voice 2nd voice

36 CLP-990

Selecting and Playing Voices

Dual mode using voices in the same voice group

Procedure

1. Select a voice group.

In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group

button.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.

3. Select another voice.

Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the

same voice group.

To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use

different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] but-

tons repeatedly.

4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any MAIN voice group button.

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 37

Selecting and Playing Voices

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two differ-

ent voices (Split mode)

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another

with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the

left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on

page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Procedure

1. Enter Split mode.

Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row).

2. Select a voice for the right hand.

Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A

[–]/[+] buttons.

3. Select a voice for the left hand.

Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C

[–]/[+] buttons.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 3 5

3 44

MAIN voice

LEFT voice

group buttons

A B

C D

NO YES

38 CLP-990

Selecting and Playing Voices

A speciﬁed “split point” key

is included in the left-hand

range.

4. Specify the split point (the border between the right-

and left-hand range).

The normal setting of the split point is “F

2.”

Voice group

Voice name

MAIN LEFT

PIANO PIANO/E.PIANO GrandPiano1

GrandPiano2

E.PIANO/BASS E.Piano1

E.Piano2

SynthPiano

BASS WoodBass

ElectricBass

Bass&Cymbal

HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET Harpsichord8'

Harpsichord8'+4'

EcelctricClavichord

MALLET Vibraphone

Marimba

Celesta

ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS PipeOrganPrincipal

PipeOrganFlute1

PipeOrganFlute2

PipeOrganTutti

JazzOrgan

STRINGS/CHOIR Strings

SynthStrings

SlowStrings

Choir

SlowChoir

Scat

TIP

Center “C”

CLP-990 39

Selecting and Playing Voices

To change the split point setting:

Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] but-

tons to specify the split point.

(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button

and play the key you wish to assign as the split point.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the voice group button that you pressed for the left-

hand range.

In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 35) for the MAIN and

LEFT ranges respectively.

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

40 CLP-990

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the metronome

The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for

practice.

Procedure

1. Start the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator ﬂashes at the

current tempo.

Adjusting the tempo

The default tempo is 120. (If

a song has been selected,

the song tempo is used.)

Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.

You can set the time signa-

ture, metronome volume,

and metronome tone using

the METRONOME [SET-

TING] button. (See page 77.)

To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO

[DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal

(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys

simultaneously.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.

2. Stop the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-990 41

Recording Your Performance

You can record your perfor-

mance (audio data) to a cas-

sette tape recorder or other

recording devices via the

AUX OUT connector. (see

page 61.)

This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova

recording function.

You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova key-

board for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part,

then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand

part.

Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the left-

and right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed perfor-

mance or ensemble song one by one to build a song.

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cas-

sette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and

a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the

saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However,

this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and

troubleshooting information.

Recording a New Song

Recording to [TRACK 1]

Procedure

If you select a song other

than “P-000: NewSong” and

record on a track that already

has data, the existing data on

the track will be lost.

1. Select “NewSong” for recording.

Press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons simulta-

neously.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

3 5

4 6

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

New Song screen

42 CLP-990

Recording Your Performance

Set the tempo in Step 3.

See page 49 for more infor-

mation on recording in Dual/

Split mode.

2. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 30).

Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus.

Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit

your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during

playback.

After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not

appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to

return to the New Song screen.

3. Enter record mode and select a recording track.

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 1] button.

The [TRACK 1] indicator ﬂashes in red. (To cancel recording, press

the [REC] or [STOP] button.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once.

You can record data while

using the metronome. The

metronome is not recorded.

When you press the

[START/PAUSE] button dur-

ing recording, recording is

paused. To resume record-

ing, press the [START/

PAUSE] button again or play

a note on the keyboard.

4. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a

note on the keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording.

The recording screen displays the current measure number.

When you press the [REC]

button, recording pauses.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova

locates the top of the song.

The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is auto-

matically cancelled.)

NOTE

Record standby screen

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Measure number in recording

Record screen

TIP

CLP-990 43

Recording Your Performance

To erase recorded data from

a track, use the Channel

Clear parameter in the

“SONG SETTING” menu.

(See page 75.)

5. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded

performance.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

Re-recording TRACK 1

This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory.

Procedure

1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previ-

ous settings.

Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 42 to re-record.

The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data.

NOTE

When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance

data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the

SaveToMemory parameter (page 52) or SaveToDisk parameter (page 53) in

the File menu.

44 CLP-990

Recording Your Performance

Re-recording TRACK 1 partially

This section explains how to record part of a song again.

Procedure

If the playback screen is not

displayed, press one of the

SONG SELECT

[] []

buttons once.

1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish

to re-record.

Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is dis-

played to move through the measures or play back the

recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a

point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish

to re-record.

2. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previ-

ous settings.

3. Select the recording method and enter record mode.

3-1 Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the

C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the

recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons

repeatedly to specify how the recording should end.

While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following record-

ing method select screen appears.

Starting methods:

Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording

starts.

Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a

note will not be erased.

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

Playback screen

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 45

Recording Your Performance

Ending methods:

Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be

erased.

Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain.

If you cancel recording by

pressing the [REC] button,

recording stops when you

press the button. If you can-

cel recording by pressing

the [STOP] button, the Clavi-

nova locates the top of the

song.

3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 1] button.

The [TRACK 1] indicator ﬂashes in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP]

button.)

Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42.

Recording to [TRACK2]

This section explains how to record another part on the second track.

Procedure

1. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording.

Repeat Step 2 on page 42.

Pressing the [TRACK 1] but-

ton repeatedly toggles

between playback on (the

indicator lights up in green)

and off (the indicator turns

off).

2. Enter record mode and select a recording track.

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 2] button.

The [TRACK 2] indicator ﬂashes in red. (To cancel recording, press

the [REC] or [STOP] button.)

Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42.

You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data.

TIP

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

46 CLP-990

Recording Your Performance

Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS]

You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one.

Procedure

1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Record-

ing to [TRACK2]” on page 45 and use the B [–]/[+] but-

tons to select a recording track (3–16).

2. While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA

TRACKS] button.

Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42.

Other recording techniques

Adding data to or recording over an existing song

The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P-

000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs

[P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data [see page 60], or your old recorded performances [see

page 50]).

Procedure

If you record on a track that

already has data, the exist-

ing data on the track will be

lost.

1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050).

Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000:

NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on

page 41. To select a song from commercial music data sold in stores or

from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 57.

To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 41 to 46.

A B

C D

NO YES

select a recording track (3-16)

NOTE

CLP-990 47

Recording Your Performance

Changing a voice or tempo after recording

You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo.

You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.

Procedure

Refer to “Questions about

Operations and Functions”

on page 97 for information

on the settings that can be

changed here.

1. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons.

2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the

song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/

[+] buttons.

Change the tempo in Step 4.

3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).

For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.

Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons

to select E.Piano2.

When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ]

[ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen.

The edited settings (except

for the tempo setting) will be

saved in memory and you

will not be able to restore the

previous settings. Proceed

with caution.

4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the

track to change.

The indicator for the selected track lights up in red.

Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.

At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE]

button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data.

5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.

TIP

CAUTION

48 CLP-990

Recording Your Performance

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG

BALANCE]

While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the play-

back of the recorded parts and your current performance.

Procedure

Commercially-available

song data contains a large

amount of data. If you are

using such songs, be sure to

adjust the song balance.

1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons.

The song balance setting is

also used during playback.

(See page 57.)

2. Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE

[ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons.

To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BAL-

ANCE [ ] or D [–] button.

To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BAL-

ANCE [ ] or D [+] button.

Setting range:

127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound)

127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound)

Normal setting: 127:127

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-990 49

Recording Your Performance

Recording in Dual or Split mode

When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The follow-

ing table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice.

CAUTION

When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see

page 46), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.

In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording.

Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16

If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used.

Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded.

Tracks assigned for

recording

Dual Split Split+Dual

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

↓↓↓ ↓↓↓ ↓↓↓

Tracks

used for

record-

ing

MAIN

(1st voice)

TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn

LEFT

(1st voice)

–

TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1

MAIN

(2nd voice)

TRACK3 TRACK4

TRACKn

–

TRACK3 TRACKn +2

LEFT

(2nd voice)

––

TRACK4 TRACKn +3

TIP

50 CLP-990

Saving Recorded Songs and

Handling the Files...[FILE]

File

A ﬁle contains a group of

data. On the Clavinova, a

song ﬁle includes song data

and a song number.

Memory

Memory is a location inside

the Clavinova in which you

can save and edit data.

Formatting (Initializing)

Floppy disks are a conve-

nient media that allow you to

save various data for per-

sonal computers and other

devices. There are many

ways (formats) to save data

on ﬂoppy disks, depending

on the device. Therefore,

you need to prepare a ﬂoppy

disk by assigning a format

before you can use it on a

particular type of device.

This operation is called “for-

matting.”

Character code

Type of characters

File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song ﬁles

(e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), copy and format disks, and

change the characters on the screen.

The following parameters are provided for these operations:

Clavinova memory

The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:

• Current memory:

This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit

the currently-selected song before playback or recording.

• Preset song memory:

This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.

• Storage memory:

This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded

from ﬂoppy disk.

When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song

memory, Storage memory, or ﬂoppy disk, into Current memory.

You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn

off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Stor-

age memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are

lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Stor-

age memory or on a ﬂoppy disk (see page 52, 53).

In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is

referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory

song,” and a song on a ﬂoppy disk is a “Disk song.”

TERMINOLOGY

Settings

Parameter

name

Reference

page

Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 52

Saves recorded and other songs on ﬂoppy disks SaveToDisk 53

Deletes song data from Clavinova memory or ﬂoppy disk

DeleteSong 53

Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 54

Copies data from ﬂoppy disk to ﬂoppy disk CopyDisk 55

Formats a ﬂoppy disk FormatDisk 56

Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 56

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

Floppy disk

Clavinova

Preset song

memory

Storage memory

Current memory

CLP-990 51

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Basic ﬁle operation

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and

troubleshooting information.

Procedure

1. Select a song, or have a ﬂoppy disk ready.

Select a song you wish to save or rename.

(Optional) Insert a ﬂoppy disk for copying or formatting into the disk

drive.

2. Access the File menu.

Press the [FILE] button.

To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.

3. Select the desired parameter.

Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired

item from the following:

“SaveToMemory”, “SaveToDisk,” “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”,

“CopyDisk”, “FormatDisk”, “CharacterCode”.

4. Set the parameter or execute the command.

Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons.

For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corre-

sponding section below.

5. Close the File menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[FILE]

A B

C D

NO YES

52 CLP-990

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage

memory...[SaveToMemory]

If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded

song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory or to a ﬂoppy disk. (To save a song to a ﬂoppy

disk, refer to the next section [SaveToDisk].) You can also save the preset songs, disk songs, and additional or

overwriting recordings (page 46) to Storage memory.

Procedure

See page 51 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

4-1 Name the song.

To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer

than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and

scroll the name.

“Execute?→”: Do you wish

to execute the operation?

“Sure?→”: Are you sure?

“Executing”: The Clavinova

is executing the operation.

“Completed”: The operation

is complete.

4-2 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→”

“Sure?

→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again

to conﬁrm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [–

(NO)] button.)

The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the opera-

tion. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears.

The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means

“Memory” and “xx” is a number.

Do not turn off the power

while the screen displays

“Executing.”

If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavi-

nova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

• You can change the type

of characters on the

screen using the Char-

acterCode parameter.

• When you select a saved

song later, the name with

an extension “.MID” will

appear.

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-990 53

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Saving recorded or other songs to ﬂoppy

disk...[SaveToDisk]

You can save recorded songs, preset songs, Memory songs, and additional or overwriting recordings

(page 46) songs onto a ﬂoppy disk.

Procedure

The song data is saved in

the SMF format (format 0).

Therefore, you can play the

disk on instruments that

support the SMF format.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

4. Make sure that a formatted ﬂoppy disk (page 56) is

inserted in the disk drive.

Follow the steps for the [SaveToMemory] operation (see page 52) to

name and save the song.

The song is automatically numbered as “Dxx,” where “D” means

“Disk” and “xx” is a number.

Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a

ﬂoppy disk...[DeleteSong]

To delete a Current song,

select “ALL” for the Channel-

Clear parameter in the

“SONG SETTING” menu

(page 75). Alternatively,

press the SONG SELECT

[ ]/[ ]

buttons simul-

taneously to display “Song

Changed Save?”. This

means “A song has been

edited. Do you wish to save

the change?” Press the B [–

(NO)] button. The Current

song is deleted and a blank

“NewSong” is selected.

You can delete Memory songs and Disk songs, but not Preset songs or Cur-

rent songs.

Procedure

See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

54 CLP-990

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

If you select a Memory song

or Disk song, deleting the

song does not erase song

data from Current memory.

However, if you return to the

song select screen, song

information other than the

song name is replaced by

“--------------”.

4-1 Select a song to delete.

Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song.

After you delete a song, the

Clavinova automatically

updates the song numbers.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

4-2 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

Renaming a song...[RenameSong]

You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong].

Procedure

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

After you rename a song,

the Clavinova sorts songs

alphabetically and renum-

bers them.

See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure for Step 4.

4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory]

section (page 52).

TIP

CAUTION

A B

C D

NO YES

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-990 55

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Copying data from one ﬂoppy disk to

another...[CopyDisk]

You can copy the entire contents of one ﬂoppy disk to another ﬂoppy disk.

Procedure

Use the same type of disk

(2DD or 2HD) for the desti-

nation disk as the source

disk.

See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure for Step 4.

4-1 Make sure that a formatted ﬂoppy disk is inserted in

the disk drive.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Insrt Target Disk:

Insert the destination (tar-

get) disk.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

4-3 When the screen indicates “Insrt Target Disk”, eject

the source disk and insert the destination disk.

When the copy operation is complete, the Clavinova displays “Com-

pleted.”

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

56 CLP-990

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Formatting a ﬂoppy disk...[FormatDisk]

You can format a ﬂoppy disk so that it can be used with the Clavinova.

Procedure

See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure for Step 4.

4-1 Make sure that the formatted ﬂoppy disk is inserted in

the disk drive.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

Changing the type of characters on screen...[Char-

acterCode]

You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.

The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”

Options: International, Japanese

Character list

[International]

[Japanese]

A B

C D

NO YES

CAUTION

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 57

Playing Back Recorded Songs and

Commercially-available Music Data

See page 59 for information

on the types of song data

that can be played on the

Clavinova.

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 41) as well

as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along

with the playback.

Playing back a song

To play back a song from a ﬂoppy disk, insert the disk into the disk drive.

Procedure

You can enjoy ensemble

performance by yourself.

Record the parts for a four-

handed song or a piano

duet, then play the recorded

part while playing the other

part on the keyboard.

1. Display the song select screen.

Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.

Use the SongRepeat

parameter in the “SONG

SETTING” menu (page 76)

to select repeat playback of

all songs or repeat playback

of a single song.

2. Select the desired song.

2-1 Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “Pre-

setSong,” “MemorySong,” or “DiskSong.”

If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavi-

nova displays “MemorySong.” If a ﬂoppy disk that contains song data

is inserted in the drive, the Clavinova displays “DiskSong.”

2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons

to select a song.

TIP

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 2-2 2-1

2-2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Song select screen

TIP

58 CLP-990

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

3. Start playback.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Syn-

chro Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called

the “Synchro Start” function.

To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] but-

ton and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator

ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the

Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.

Bar: measure

You can play the metronome

along with the song play-

back. When you stop play-

back, the metronome is also

stopped.

In the song select screen:

You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by

using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is

playing or stopped.

You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can

also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the

voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback

parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]

buttons. (See page 48.)

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

Adjusting the tempo

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s

original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simul-

taneously.

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

4. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the C[–]

button while playback is

stopped in the middle of

the song to locate the

top of the song.

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the C[–]

button during playback

to restart playback from

the top of the song.

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the

C[+] button during play-

back to start playback

from the next song.

A B

C D

NO YES

The bar number in playback

CLP-990 59

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

5. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

Eject the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive if you have been playing a

disk song.

Turning track playback on and off

When the Clavinova plays

back commercially-avail-

able music data or record-

ings from other instruments,

all track indicators may light

up green regardless of

whether or not all tracks

contains data.

You can practice a part or

phrase using the FromToRe-

peat (page 75) and Phrase-

Mark parameters (page 76)

in the “SONG SETTING”

menu.

When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that con-

tain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While

the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the

indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track

buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned

off.

Supported song data type

Data formats that can be played on the CLP-990

The Clavinova CLP-990 plays song data in the following formats:

Disk format:

A structured method for writ-

ing data to disk.

Floppy disk format

3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format

3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format

Sequence format:

A structured method for

recording performance data.

Sequence format

SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1

ESEQ

Performance data recorded on the CLP-990 is saved in the SMF for-

mat 0 in a ﬂoppy disk.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

60 CLP-990

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

Voice arrangement format:

A structured method for

numbering the voices for

assignment.

Voice arrangement format

XG voice arrangement

GM system level 1 voice arrangement

DOC voice arrangement

Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-990 can be

played on other XG-compatible instruments.

The CLP-990 provides XG voices for song playback, as well as preset

voices. See page 6 of the separate “Reference Booklet” for the XG voice

list.

Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 101 for more information on

formats.

Song data recorded on other instruments

When you play on the CLP-990 song data recorded on the Clavinova CVP-

109, 107, 105, 103, 98, 96, 94, 92, or CLP-870, you may notice a slight differ-

ence in volume balance, although the voices sound almost identical. You can

also play back song data from the Yamaha Disklavier player piano.

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-990 61

Connections

Connectors

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before

turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or

damage to the components may occur.

Do not route the output from

the AUX OUT jacks to the

AUX IN jacks. That is, when

you connect an external

audio device to the AUX

OUT jacks, do not connect

the audio device to the

Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If

you make this connection,

the signal input at the AUX

IN jacks is output from the

AUX OUT. This creates an

audio loop, causing audio

oscillation and abnormal

playback, leading to mal-

function of both pieces of

equipment.

Use audio cables and

adapter plugs with no resis-

tance.

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] slider setting

does not affect the signal

output from the AUX OUT

jacks.

1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a

cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below

and use audio cables for connection.

Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not

using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio sys-

tem, ﬁrst turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system.

Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

AUX PEDAL

MIDI

OUTIN THRU

L/L

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

TO HOST

5 4 3

CAUTION

TIP

AUX OUT

AUX IN

RCA phono plug

Clavinova

phone plug

(standard)

alternatively

RCA phono

→phone adapter plug

RCA phono plug

audio cable

cassette tape recorder

stereo system

L/L

AUX OUT

62 CLP-990

Connections

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] slider setting

affects the input signal from

the AUX IN jacks, but the

[REVERB], [CHORUS], and

[BRILLIANCE] (page 32) set-

tings do not.

If you connect the Clavi-

nova to a monaural device,

use only the AUX IN [L/L+R]

jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R]

jack.

2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,

allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavi-

nova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connec-

tion.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst

turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order

when you turn the power off.

3 AUX PEDAL jack

Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here.

Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by control-

ling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you

to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button

function to this foot switch. (See page 89.)

4 TO HOST jack

This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Con-

necting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.)

5 HOST SELECT switch

This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or

personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63

for more information.)

TIP

AUX IN

Tone Generator

AUX OUT (OUTPUT)

Clavinova

phone plug

(standard)

audio cable

Plug shape depends

on the divece.

AUX IN

L/L

CLP-990 63

Connections

MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page)

to MIDI when you use these connectors.

Connecting a personal computer

You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI)

jack.

There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 64)

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 66)

3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 67)

For more information, refer to the following pages.

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer

before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn

on the power to the computer ﬁrst, then to the Clavinova.

If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left

connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.

When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connec-

tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT

switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO

HOST jack.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what

you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer sys-

tem (the manual is not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in

English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments):

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

(You need to register ﬁrst. Check the Clavinova web page.)

TIP

64 CLP-990

Connections

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack

Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack.

In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special

MIDI interface.

Connection

Use a special serial cable (page 65) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavi-

nova’s TO HOST jack.

TO HOST

Windows Windows Macintosh

modem port

Clavinova

RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin)

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

TO HOST

Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a

speciﬁed MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the

following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:

http://www.yamaha-xg.com

CLP-990 65

Connections

Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments

According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer.

• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)

• Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)

If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different

settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data

transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.)

8 (CTS)

7 (RTS)

2 (RxD)

5 (GND)

3 (TxD)

• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)

mini DIN

8-pin

D-sub

9-pin

mini DIN

8-pin

2 (HSK i)

1 (HSK O)

5 (RxD-)

4 (GND)

3 (TxD-)

8 (RxD+)

7 (GP-)

6 (TxD+)

mini DIN

8-pin

• Macintosh

System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent)

mini DIN

8-pin

5 (CTS)

4 (RTS)

3 (RxD)

7 (GND)

2 (TxD)

D-sub

25-pin

• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent)

mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin

Pin numbers (view from front)

D-sub 9-pin

1234567891011

14 15 16 17

45321

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

12 13

9876

• Pin assignment

The following diagram shows the pin assignments

for each cable.

TIP

66 CLP-990

Connections

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors

Connection

Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

MIDI

OUTIN THRU

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

Clavinova

Windows Macintosh

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

MIDI interface

CLP-990 67

Connections

3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface

Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came

with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or

MIDI cables.

For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256.

UX256 Yamaha USB-MIDI interface.

Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable

Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables

UX256

Clavinova

USB cable

computer

Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable

HOST SELECT

Mac

TO HOST

PC-1

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

USB cable

MIDI cables

Clavinova

UX256

computer

MIDI

OUTIN

HOST SELECT

MIDI

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

68 CLP-990

CLP-990 69

Detailed Settings

CLP-990 69

70 CLP-990

Detailed Settings

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as ﬁne tuning the pitch,

selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 72 for the normal (default) setting for

each parameter.

Parameter List

The following parameters are available.

Recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

Metronome METRONOME [SETTING]

Voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Correcting note timing Quantize 74

Specifying whether playback starts immediately

along with the ﬁrst voicing

QuickPlay 75

Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 75

Deleting data by each channel ChannelClear 75

Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly FromToRepeat 75

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed by the phrase

number

PhraseMark 76

Playing back a song repeatedly SongRepeat 76

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Metronome time signature TimeSignature 77

Metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 77

Metronome voice MetronomeSound 77

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Octave* Octave 78

Volume level* Volume 78

Position of right and left channels* Pan 79

Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Detune 79

Reverb type ReverbType 79

Reverb depth* ReverbSend 79

Chorus type ChorusType 80

Chorus depth* ChorusSend 80

Chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 80

Variation effect type VariationType 80

Variation effect depth* VariationSend 81

Touch sensitivity* TouchSense 81

CLP-990 71

Detailed Settings

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

[OTHER SETTING]

Right pedal function RPedal 81

Center pedal function MPedal 82

Left pedal function LPedal 82

Auxiliary pedal function AuxPedal 82

Settings Parameter name Reference page

MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 84

MIDI receive channel (Port A) MidiInAChannel 84

MIDI receive channel (Port B) MidiInBChannel 85

Local control on/off LocalControl 85

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song

data for MIDI transmission

MidiOutSelect 85

Type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 85

Type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 86

Song data bulk dump SongBulkDump 86

Transmitting the initial settings InitialSetup 86

Voice data bulk dump VoiceBulkDump 86

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 87

Fine tuning of the pitch Tune 87

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 87

Selecting a scale Scale 88

Depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 88

Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 88

Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect VivraphoneRotorSpeed 89

Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone VibraphonePedalMode 89

Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal PedalStart/Pause 89

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 89

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts

to affect the sound

HalfPedalPoint 90

Pitch bend range PitchBendRange 90

Replacing the preset voices with XG voices XGAlternative 90

Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown MemoryBackUp 91

Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 91

72 CLP-990

Detailed Settings

Making detailed settings

Procedure

1. Access a setting menu.

Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], MET-

RONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING],

or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting

menu.

Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.

2. Select the desired parameter or part.

Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] but-

tons repeatedly as required.

3. Set the parameter or part.

Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use

the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons

to select or set the option.

To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[SONG SETTING]

[OTHER SETTING]

[MIDI SETTING]

[VOICE SETTING]

METRONOME [SETTING]

A [–] [+] B [–

(

)

] [+

(

YES

)

]

C [–] [+] D [–] [+]

CLP-990 73

Detailed Settings

4. Write, execute, or save the data.

There are two ways to respond to the messages.

If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to display conﬁrmation ([Sure?→]). To

proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays

“Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it

displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous

screen.

To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B

[+(YES)] button.

If “Set?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova dis-

plays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete,

it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previ-

ous screen.

5. Close the setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

74 CLP-990

Detailed settings for recording

and playback [SONG SETTING]

You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”),

memory songs (“MemorySong”), or disk songs (“DiskSong”) (see page 57).

Procedure

Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu.

You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you

can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth

notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively

(with a swing type of rhythm).

• Changes are made by song.

• You can also listen to the sound while changing the

setting. To change the data, you need to respond to

“Execute?

→.”

See the procedure on page 72.

Notes for which you can adjust the timing:

If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavi-

nova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to

make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging.

Setting range:

0% - 100%

If you select “1/8” for correction:

Save the edited song data to memory or a disk.

(See page 50.)

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[SONG SETTING]

Correcting note timing [Quantize]

A B

C D

NO YES

Specifies the type of note.

Stores the changed value.

[OFF]

[1/4]

[1/8]

[1/16]

[1/12]

[1/24]

quarter note

eighth note

sixteenth note

eighth note triplets

sixteenth note triplets

3 3

Performance data

Swing rate = 50% : not swinging

Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) :

The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed.

Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) :

The timing of even beat notes is slightly early.

Swing rate = 67% :

The timing of the even beat notes is moved to

the third beat of the triplets.

TIP

CLP-990 75

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify whether a song

that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a

silence prior to the ﬁrst note, should be played from

the ﬁrst note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank).

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

[On] Playing from the ﬁrst note

[Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest

or blank)

You can select a single channel to listen to its contents.

Playback starts from the ﬁrst note.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16

Usually, channels that do not contain any data are not dis-

played. However, for some songs, all channels (including the

channels that contain no data) may be displayed.

You can delete data from each of 16 channels.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels)

• Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.

However, for some songs, all channels (including the

channels that contain no data) may be displayed.

• Save the edited song data to memory or disk.

(See page 50.)

You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to

play back repeatedly.

• Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat

speciﬁed as the end point.

• If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”

selected, the count down starts, followed by the

repeated playback of the speciﬁed part until you

press the [STOP] button.

• If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.

See the procedure on page 72.

When you select another song, the speciﬁed range is auto-

matically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off.

Specifying whether playback

starts immediately along with the

ﬁrst voicing [QuickPlay]

Auditioning the channels [Chan-

nelListen]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons to select the desired channel

for playback.

Playback continues as long

as you press and hold down this button.

TIP

Deleting data from each channel

[ChannelClear]

Specifying the range and playing

back repeatedly [FromToRepeat]

A B

C D

NO YES

Press this button to delete data.

Use these buttons to select the desired channel

for deletion.

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons

to specify the end point

of the repeated range.

Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”

Use these buttons

to specify the start point

of the repeated range.

NOTE

76 CLP-990

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk,

such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the

“XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers

in the score to play back from the score from the mark

point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly.

• If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”

selected, the count down starts, followed by the

repeated playback of the speciﬁed phrase until you

press the [STOP] button.

• If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts

from the speciﬁed phrase.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range of the phrase number:

Off (not speciﬁed)

1 - the last phrase number of the song

If you select any song other than those from the “Disk

Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano”

disks, you can select only “Off.”

You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song

selected from the 50 preset songs or from the ﬂoppy

disks.

• When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the

song you selected using the front panel, then starts

repeat playback of the speciﬁed songs until you press

the [STOP] button.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

[DiskSongs] All songs in the ﬂoppy disk inserted

in the disk drive

[MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory

[Disk+Memory] All songs from “DiskSongs” and

“MemorySongs”

[PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs

[ALL] All songs from “DiskSongs,” “Mem-

orySongs,” and “PresetSongs”

[OneSong] One song selected from the front

panel

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed

by the phrase number [Phrase-

Mark]

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons to specify the phrase number.

Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”

Playing back a song repeatedly

[SongRepeat]

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs.

Use these buttons to select “On.”

CLP-990 77

Detailed settings for the metro-

nome METRONOME [SETTING]

You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.

Procedure

Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metro-

nome Setting menu.

See the procedure on page 72.

For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons

to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.”

Setting range for the numerator:

1 - 16

Setting options for the denominator:

2, 4, and 8

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

0-127

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

[BellOff] Click (standard metronome sound)

[EnglishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English

[GermanVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German

[JapaneseVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese

[FrenchVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French

[SpanishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish

[BellOn] Click and bell

To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

METRONOME [SETTING]

Setting the metronome time sig-

nature [TimeSignature]

Setting the metronome volume

level [MetronomeVolume]

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons

to set the denominator

of the time signature.

Use these buttons

to set the numerator

of the time signature.

A B

C D

NO YES

Selecting the metronome voice

[MetronomeSound]

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

78 CLP-990

Detailed settings for the voices

[VOICE SETTING]

This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can

make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play

on the keyboard while changing the settings.

Procedure

1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the

“Voice Setting” menu.

2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to

change the voice.

The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.

[Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)

[Main

× Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual

mode)

[Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)

[Left

× Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps.

See the procedure on page 72.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

–2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two

octaves higher)

You can set the volume level for each voice part.

See the procedure on page 72.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[VOICE SETTING]

TIP

Setting the octave [Octave]*

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the volume level

[Volume]*

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 79

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You can specify the position in the stereo image from

which you hear the sound.

See the procedure on page 72.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right)

You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected

for Dual mode.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

–20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is

raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With nega-

tive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch

of Voice 2 is raised.)

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and

“LeftXLayer.”

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Room Simulates reverberation in a room.

Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.

Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of

“Hall1.”

Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument

sound.

Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal

plate.

The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter

is set to “0.”

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting the position of right and

left channels [Pan]*

Fine tuning the pitch (only in

Dual mode) [Detune]

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2)

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

A B

C D

NO YES

Selecting the reverb type

[ReverbType]

Setting the reverb depth

[ReverbSend]*

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

80 CLP-990

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and

“Left

× Layer.”

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound.

Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound.

Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or

descending jet plane.

See the procedure on page 72.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each

voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off set-

ting for the voice automatically changes according to

this parameter.

Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is dis-

abled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

On/Off

You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus).

See the procedure on page 72.

Selecting the chorus type [Chorus

Type]

Setting the chorus depth [Cho-

rusSend]*

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Setting the chorus on/off

[ChorusOnOff]

Selecting the variation effect

type [VariationType]

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 81

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

Setting range:

DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right

positions.

DelayLR Delay applied at left and right posi-

tions.

Echo Echo-like delay

CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.

Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.

RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary

speaker.

Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid

cycles.

VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone.

AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back

and forth.

Phaser The phase changes periodically,

swelling the sound.

AutoWah The center frequency of the wah ﬁlter

changes periodically.

SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a

piano soundboard.

Off No effect.

See the procedure on page 72.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

This parameter enables determines the manner and

degree to which the volume level changes in response

to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play).

Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe

organs do not change regardless of how you play the

keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127.

(See the setting range below.)

See the procedure on page 72.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127

(loudest and ﬁxed)

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

SustainCont Damper function that sustains the

sound longer as you press the pedal

deeper.

Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.

PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.

Off No function.

Normal setting:

SustainCount

Setting the variation effect depth

[VariationSend]*

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the touch sensitivity

[TouchSense]*

Setting the right pedal function

[RPedal]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

A B

C D

NO YES

82 CLP-990

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.)

RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the

rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.

(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles

between fast and slow rotation speeds.)

VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice

on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeat-

edly toggles between on and off.)

Off No function.

Normal Setting:

Sostenuto

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.)

RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the

rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.

(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles

between fast and slow rotation speeds.)

VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone

voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal

repeatedly toggles between on and off.)

Off No function.

Normal Setting:

Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and Vibra-

Phone)

Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor)

You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the

Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.

Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.

(See page 31.)

SustainCont Damper function that sustains the

sound longer as you press the pedal

deeper. (See page 31.)

PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.

Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.)

Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.)

RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the

rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan

voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles

between fast and slow rotation speeds.)

VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone

voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal

repeatedly toggles between on and off.)

Off No function.

Normal setting:

Expression

Optional pedals

• Yamaha FC7 foot controller

This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression,

SustainCont, and PitchBend.

• Yamaha FC4 foot controller

Yamaha FC5 foot controller

These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain,

Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor.

Setting the center pedal function

[MPedal]

Setting the left pedal function

[LPedal]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Setting the auxiliary pedal func-

tion [AuxPedal]

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-990 83

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels.

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the

transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers.

Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a con-

nected MIDI device or computer.

MIDI connectors

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is.

Prepare dedicated MIDI cables.

[TO HOST] connector

Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer.

The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-

sonal Computer” on page 63 for more information.

MIDI

OUTIN THRU

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

TIP

HOST SELECT

PC-1

PC-2

MacMIDI

TO HOST

TIP

MIDI performance data and

commands are transferred in

the form of numeric values.

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received var-

ies depending on the type of

MIDI device, check the “MIDI

Implementation Chart” to ﬁnd

out what MIDI data and com-

mands your devices can

transmit or receive. The Clavi-

nova’s MIDI Implementation

Chart is listed on pages 31

and 32 in the “Reference

Booklet” for the CLP-990.

When you are using the

MIDI connectors, set the

[HOST SELECT] switch to

“MIDI.” (See page 63.)

When you are using the [TO

HOST] connector, set the

[HOST SELECT] switch cor-

rectly, according to the type

of computer you are using.

(See page 63.)

You can also obtain detailed

information about MIDI from

various music magazines

and books.

TIP

84 CLP-990

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

Procedure

Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode.

This parameter enables you to specify the channel on

which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting for:

Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)

Normal setting:

Main — Ch1

Left — Ch2

Layer — Ch3

Left Layer— Ch4

This parameter enables you to specify for each channel

whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]

connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s

port A).

The received data is played back using the XG voices (page

6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-990). You can also

assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See

“XG Alternative” on page 90.)

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting for:

Ch1 - Ch16

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all channels

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[MIDI SETTING]

Setting the MIDI transmit chan-

nel [MidiOutChannel]

Setting the MIDI receive channel

(Port A) [MidiInAChannel]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a voice part. Specify the channel.

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a channel. Select On or Off.

MIDI IN

TO HOST

Sound source A

Channels 1-16

Port A Port B

Sound source B

Channels 1-16

MIDI data

Used for song playback

Used for performance

and playback

CLP-990 85

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify for each channel

whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]

connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s

port B).

The received data is played back using the preset voices

(page 103).

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting for:

Ch1 - Ch16

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all channels

“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova

produces the sound from its tone generator when you

play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off” state, the

keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each

other. This means that even if you play the keyboard,

the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the

keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a con-

nected MIDI device, which can produce the sound.

The “Local Control Off” setting is useful when you

wish to play an external sound source while playing the

keys on the Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

You can select whether your performance data or song

playback data (including demo songs) is sent via

MIDI.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard)

Song (song playback data)

Normal setting:

Keyboard

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can receive.

See the procedure on page 72.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System

Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

Setting the MIDI receive channel

(Port B) [MidiInAChannel]

Setting Local control on/off

[LocalControl]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a channel. Select On or Off.

A B

C D

NO YES

Selecting performance from the

keyboard or song data for MIDI

transmission [MidiOutSelect]

Selecting a type of data received

via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a type of data. Select On or Off.

86 CLP-990

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can transmit.

See the procedure on page 72.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime,

SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

You can save current song data on the Clavinova as

MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI

data ﬁler (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play

back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from

the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the

usual playback procedure.

You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission

by pressing the B [– (NO)] button.

See the procedure on page 72.

You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selec-

tion, to a connected sequencer. Before you record per-

formance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is

useful if you ﬁrst send and record (at the beginning of

the performance data) the panel setup data for your

performance during playback.

See the procedure on page 72.

You can transmit the voice data speciﬁed in the “Voice

Setting” menu (page 78) as MIDI bulk data. You can

interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by press-

ing the B [– (NO)] button.

See the procedure on page 72.

Selecting a type of data transmit-

ted via MIDI [TransmitParameter]

Executing song data bulk dump

[SongBulkDump]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a type of data. Select On or Off.

A B

C D

NO YES

Transmitting the initial settings

on the panel [InitialSetup]

Executing voice data bulk dump

[VoiceBulkDump]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 87

Other settings

You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.

Procedure

Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode.

You can specify a touch response (how the sound

responds to the way you play the keys).

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a

loud sound. The volume level of tones tends

to be consistent.

Medium Standard touch response.

Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a

loud volume. This allows for versatile expres-

sion, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones.

Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be

the same regardless of how hard you play the

keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the vol-

ume level.

Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:

1 - 127

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instrument.

This function is useful when you play the Clavinova

along with other instruments or CD music.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps)

You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and

“GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning

curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of

other instruments voices.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos

Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is

octave doubled over the entire keyboard

range

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-990

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[OTHER SETTING]

Selecting a touch response

[TouchResponse]

A B

C D

NO YES

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]

Selecting a tuning curve for a

piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

88 CLP-990

Other settings

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common contempo-

rary piano tuning scale. However, history has known

numerous other scales, many of which serve as the

basis for certain genres of music. You can experience

the tunings of these genres.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal inter-

vals. Currently most popular piano tuning

scale.

PureMajor/PureMinor

Based on natural overtones, three major chords

using these scales produce a beautiful, pure

sound. They are sometimes used for chorus

parts.

Pythagorean

This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek

philosopher, is composed of only ﬁve pitches.

The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th

are beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MeanTone

This scale is an improvement of the

Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has

been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th

century through the late 18th century. Handel

used this scale.

WerckMeister/KirnBerger

These scales combine Mean Tone and

Pythagorean in different ways. With these

scales, modulation changes the impression and

feel of the songs. They were often used in the

era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often

used now to reproduce the music of that era on

harpsichords.

Normal setting:

Equal

If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to spec-

ify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons.

Setting range:

C, C

, D, E

, E, F, F

, G, A

, A, B

, B

This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

1 - 10, Off

This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

1 - 10, Off

Selecting a scale [Scale]

A B

C D

NO YES

Depth of string resonance

[StringResonanceDepth]

Depth of sustain sampling for the

damper pedal [SustainSam-

plingDepth]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-990 89

Other settings

This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato

when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe

rotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

1 - 10, Off

This parameter enables you to select whether the

sound is sustained while you press the keys on the key-

board (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only

while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like

playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”).

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

PianoLike, Normal

Normal setting:

PianoLike

If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn

the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in

the Voice Setting menu (pages 81 and 82) is disabled.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting for:

Left, Middle, AUX

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

Off for all pedals

A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector

may switch on and off differently. For example, some

pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off

when you press them.

Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

Make, Break

Setting the speed of vibraphone’s

vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotor-

Speed]

Selecting a pedal function for

vibraphone

[VibraphonePedalMode]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Assigning the START/PAUSE func-

tion to a pedal [PedalStart/

Pause]

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal

[AuxPedalType]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off.

A B

C D

NO YES

90 CLP-990

Other settings

You can specify how far down you should press on the

right pedal until the damper effect (page 31) starts

working. This setting is effective when the right pedal

function (page 81) is set to either SustainCont or Sus-

tain.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

–2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effec-

tive with the deepest press)

This parameter enables you to set the range of continu-

ous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function.

• This parameter is effective only on the keyboard

performance sound.

• You can set the range in semitone steps.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting range:

–12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave]

when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12

semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.)

Normal setting:

–2

The CLP-990 provides the XG tone generator for the

purpose of playing GM, XG, or DOC music data

(page 60). You can replace some XG voices with the

preset voices on the panel for playback. This parameter

enables you to select “Native” (using the preset voices)

or “XG” (using the XG voices).

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting for:

All preset voices on the panel

Setting range:

Native Using the preset voices

XG Using the XG voices

Normal setting:

GrandPiano1 Native (using the preset voices)

Other voices XG (using the XG voices)

Setting the point at which the

damper pedal starts to affect the

sound [HalfPedalPoint]

Pitch bend range

[PitchBendRange]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Replacing the XG voices with pre-

set voices [XGAlternative]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select the desired item. Select on or off.

CLP-990 91

Other settings

You can back up some settings, such as voice selection

and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost

after you turn off the power to the Clavinova.

• Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory),

the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting),

and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting

(page 56) are always backed up.

See the procedure on page 72.

Setting for:

Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/

LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBal-

ance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSet-

ting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set

to On.

You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory

default) settings.

• The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File

menu does not change.

• The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off)

(left column) is reset to the normal setting.

• You can specify whether the memory songs are

erased or kept.

See the procedure on page 72.

Selecting for “MemorySong”:

MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept.

MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are erased.

Press and hold down the white key on the right end

(C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the

power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs

saved in the storage memory are not erased.

If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press

and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and

black key (B

6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn

on the power to the Clavinova.

Selecting items saved at shut-

down [MemoryBackUp]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select the desired item. Select on or off.

Restoring the normal (default)

settings [FactorySet]

Other method for restoring the

normal settings

A B

C D

NO YES

Reset the Clavinova.

Select a value for memory songs.

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

[POWER]

92 CLP-990

Message List

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message Meaning

This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/

Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can

proceed to the next step.

Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again.

The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is dis-

played. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.

The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is

displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.

You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 86) or “VoiceBulkDump”

(page 86) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button.

This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavi-

nova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step.

Writing or reading data from the disk has failed. Try again. If you still see

this message, the disk may be damaged or the disk drive may have malfunc-

tion. If you see this message while using a brand new disk, it is more likely

that the disk drive is malfunctioning. Ask your Yamaha dealer for repair.

The ﬂoppy disk space is full and can no longer record data. Use a new disk

(page 53) or delete unnecessary ﬁles from the disk (page 53) to make room

for new data.

You attempted to eject a ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive while the drive was

writing or reading. The writing or reading operation is not complete yet. Try

it again.

CLP-990 93

Message List

Message Meaning

You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page

54), “SaveToMemory” (page 52), or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parameter), but

a song with the same name already exists in memory or on the ﬂoppy disk.

Three seconds after this message appears, the previous screen is restored.

Rename the song.

This message prompts you to execute a ﬁle-related operation. Press the B [+

(YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message dis-

appears, then proceed to the next step.

The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting)

(“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if

you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova

(page 91).

The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting)

(“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if

you press and hold down the C7 and B

6 keys and turn on the power to the

Clavinova (page 91).

The Clavinova’s ﬂash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your

Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the

songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the pre-

vious screen.

In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy source disk has not been

inserted to the disk drive. Insert the disk.

In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy destination disk has not been

inserted into the disk drive. Insert the disk.

You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to

storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power.

The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered.

This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-

rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the stor-

age memory as much as possible.

94 CLP-990

Message List

Message Meaning

This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-

rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in

the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted.

There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs.

Save songs to a ﬂoppy disk (page 53) or delete some songs in the storage

memory, then save new data to memory.

A ﬂoppy disk has not been inserted into the disk drive for a disk-related

operation. Insert the disk and continue.

You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory or on

disk. You cannot delete the song.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the exist-

ing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+

(YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after

you select the song. Wait until the message disappears.

1. You tried to write, copy, or delete data on a disk that has its “write pro-

tect” tab on, or a disk that is internally protected against writing. Set the

protect tab to off (unprotected) (page 14) and try again. If you still see

this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially avail-

able music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk.

2. This message also appears when you try to copy data on an internally-

protected disk onto another disk using the CopyDisk function (page 55).

You cannot duplicate such a disk.

You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected ﬁles (such as com-

mercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such

ﬁles.

CLP-990 95

Message List

Message Meaning

1. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current

memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a ﬂoppy disk.

You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to

such a disk.

2. This message also appears if you try to transmit bulk data (page 86) of

an internally-protected song (such as commercially available music

data). You cannot transmit bulk data of such songs.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited set-

tings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] but-

ton to cancel.

You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to

storage memory or a ﬂoppy disk. If you continue the operation, the

recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)]

button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova

displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 52) or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parame-

ter screen. If necessary, select “SaveToMemory” or “SaveToDisk” accordingly

and save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation.

The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song.

Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data

may be damaged.

The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops auto-

matically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also

appears when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional

recording but the song data already ﬁlls the Current memory. In this case,

you cannot make an additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parame-

ter (page 75) to delete unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in

memory.

The size of the selected song is larger than the Current memory (page 97).

The CLP-990 cannot read the song. Select another song.

This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+

(YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

96 CLP-990

Message List

Message Meaning

This message prompts you to conﬁrm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)]

button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector.

When you are using the CLP-990 with a connected computer:

The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incor-

rectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI

application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the

CLP-990 and the computer, then check the cable connections and the

[HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer

and the CLP-990 in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI appli-

cation on the computer work properly.

When you are using only the CLP-990:

This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on

the CLP-990. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-990, remove the

cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP-990.

If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP-990 may

not work correctly.

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or disk-related operation using an unformatted

disk. Eject the disk, format it using the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 56),

and try again.

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or disk-related operation using an unformatted

disk. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the

disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the “FormatDisk”

parameter (page 56).

You tried to copy data to a different type of disk (e.x.: 2DD

→2HD,

2HD

→2DD) during the CopyDisk operation (page 55). Eject the disk and

insert an appropriate disk.

You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to

change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported

by the CLP-990, and the CLP-990 could not process the name. The Clavi-

nova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song cor-

rectly.

CLP-990 97

Questions about Operations

and Functions

■ The buttons do not respond.

While you are using a function, some buttons not

used for the function are disabled. If the song is

playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the

[EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then,

perform the desired operation.

■

The sound sustains and does not decay when I

press the sostenuto pedal.

With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/

CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining

while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal.

■

Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly

when the transpose or octave setting is made.

The setting range for the transposition and octave

setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the

Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If

the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will

produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest

key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a

sound one octave lower.

■

How can I return to the recording or song select

screen during song recording or playback?

Press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] and [ ]

buttons once.

■

The tempo does not change even though I

recorded with tempo changes.

Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the

changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case,

the recording will be played back at the original

tempo.

Make tempo changes when the recording track is

selected and a red track indicator is ﬂashing. The

same trick applies to editing the tempo after record-

ing.

■

Performance in Dual or Split mode is not

recorded.

Track data is lost unexpectedly.

For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording

track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the

left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 48).

Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will

be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to

Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song

is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played

with the second voice (or the notes lower than the

Split point) are not recorded.

■

What type of data is recorded?

Data recorded in the tracks:

• Note data (notes you play)

• Voice selection

• Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off

• Reverb depth “ReverbSend”

• Chorus depth “ChorusSend”

• Variation effect depth “VariationSend”

• Voice octave setting “Octave”

• Voice volume level “Volume”

• Stereo image of each voice “Pan”

• Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode)

“Detune”

• Volume level changes for each voice with

response to the way you play “TouchSense”

Data recorded globally in all tracks:

•Tempo

• Time signature

•Reverb type

• Chorus type

• Variation effect type

You can change all data except for note data after record-

ing.

You can change the time signature at the beginning of the

song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by

using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped.

98 CLP-990

Questions about Operations and Functions

■ I cannot change the key signature in the song

after recording.

Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the

song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the mea-

sure in which you wish to change the key signature,

then change it.

■

How much data can I record?

• Current memory (page 50): About 600KB

• Storage memory (page 50): About 750KB

• 2DD ﬂoppy disk (page 13): about 720KB

• 2HD ﬂoppy disk (page 13): about 1.4MB

■

The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the

AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.

Some types of pedals may turn on and off in oppo-

site fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter

(page 89) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to

change the external pedal setting.

■

The song title is not correct.

The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than

that used when you named the song. Also, if the

song was recorded on another instrument, the title

might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “Character-

Code” parameter (page 56) in the FILE menu to

change the setting. However, if the song was

recorded on another instrument, changing the

“CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve

the problem.

■

What is the difference between “TouchSense”

and “TouchResponse” MIDI data?

“TouchSense” determines the manner and degree

to which the volume level changes in response to

your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclu-

sive data (that controls the tone generator) to be

output.

“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity

as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity

data to be output.

CLP-990 99

Appendix

CLP-990 99

100 CLP-990

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The Clavinova does not turn on.

The Clavinova has not been

plugged in properly.

Securely insert the female plug into

the socket on the Clavinova, and

the male plug into a proper AC out-

let. (See page 19.)

A click or pop is heard when the

power is turned on or off.

Electrical current is being applied to

the instrument.

This is normal, and is no cause for

concern.

Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s

speakers.

The noise may be due to interfer-

ence caused by the use of a mobile

phone in close proximity to the

Clavinova.

Turn off the mobile phone, or use it

further away from the Clavinova.

The overall volume is low, or no

sound is heard.

The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too

low.

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME]

level. (See page 20.)

Headphones are connected.

Unplug the headphones. (See page

20.)

The Local Control function is turned

off.

Turn the Local Control function on.

(See page 85.)

The pitch and/or tone of the piano

voices in certain ranges do not

sound right.

The Clavinova’s piano voices

attempt to precisely simulate actual

piano sounds. However, as a result

of sampling algorithms, overtones

in some ranges may sound exag-

gerated, producing a somewhat dif-

ferent pitch or tone.

This is normal.

Mechanical noise is heard during

performance.

The Clavinova’s keyboard mecha-

nism simulates the keyboard mech-

anism of a piano. Mechanical noise

is also heard on a piano.

This is normal.

CLP-990 101

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the

data recorded by CLP-990, and whether or not the CLP-990 can playback commercially available song data or song

data created for other instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem,

or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems

playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Basic Check Points

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards

to the items below.

• Disk Format

• Sequence format

• Voice allocation format

Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data

used with various devices, including computers. Dif-

ferent devices have different systems of saving data,

therefore it is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy

disk to the system of the device being used. This opera-

tion is called “formatting.”

• There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (dou-

ble sided, double density) and MF2HD (double

sided, high density), and each type has different for-

matting systems.

• CLP-990 can record and playback with both types of

ﬂoppy disks.

• When formatted by the CLP-990, a 2DD disk saves

up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk saves up to

1.44 MB (megabytes). (The ﬁgures “720 KB” and

“1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They

are also used to indicate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to

be used is compatible with the format of the disk.

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

• Playback is only possible when the sequence format

of the disk matches that of the MIDI device.

[Common Sequence Formats]

■

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one

of two types: Format 0 or Format 1.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format

0, and most commercially available software is

recorded as Format 0.

• The CLP-990 is compatible with both Format 0

and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of

17 chunks).

• Performance data recorded on the CLP-990 is

saved in the SMF format 0 in a ﬂoppy disk.

■

ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova

series instruments. This is a common format used

with various Yamaha software.

• The CLP-990 is compatible with ESEQ.

102 CLP-990

Data Compatibility

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

• Voices may not play back as expected unless the

voice allocation format of the song data matches

that of the compatible MIDI device used for play-

back.

[Main Voice Allocation Formats]

■

GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation

formats.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM Sys-

tem Level 1, as is most commercially available

software.

• The CLP-990 is compatible with GM System

Level 1.

■

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level

1 format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally

to provide more voices and variations, as well as

greater expressive control over voices and effects,

and to ensure compatibility of data well into the

future.

• The CLP-990 is compatible with XG.

• Performance data recorded with preset voices on

the CLP-990 can be played on other XG-compati-

ble instruments.

■

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with

many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the

Clavinova series instruments.

This is also common format used with various

Yamaha software.

The CLP-990 is compatible with DOC.

• Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the

conditions above, the data may still not be com-

pletely compatible, depending on the speciﬁca-

tions of the devices and particular data recording

methods.

CLP-990 103

Preset Voice List

Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ●

This voice has been sampled from a full con-

cert grand piano. It features ﬁve-stage dynamic

sampling, tone changes with damper pedal

operation, and a subtle voicing at the release

of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic

piano sound. It also reproduces a string reso-

nance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This

voice is suitable not only for classical music but

for piano music of any genre.

GrandPiano2 ● ●

×××

A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal

for rock and popular genres.

E.Piano1 ● ● ●

××

An electronic piano sound created by FM syn-

thesis. Extremely “musical” response with vary-

ing timbre according to keyboard dynamics.

E.Piano2

● ● ●

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-

struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played

lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard.

SynthPiano

●

×××

This voice simulates the electric piano sound

produced by synthesizers in popular music. It

also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.

WoodBass ● ● ● ●

This voice simulates the sound of an upright

bass played with the ﬁngers, and is suitable for

jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has

improved the acoustic feel.

ElectricBass

● ●

××

Electric bass for a wide range of music styles,

jazz, rock, popular, and more.

Bass&Cymbal ● ● ●

××

WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal

sound are layered. This voice is very effective

for a jazz walking bass.

Harpsichord8' ●

××

●

The harpsichord is often used for Baroque

music. The volume level is always consistent

regardless of how you play. The instrument

generates a peculiar voice when you release

the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same

octave sound as the keys.

Harpsichord8'+4' ●

××

●

This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord

sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound

one octave higher than the actual keys.

ElectricClavichord

●

This is the voice of a keyboard that produces

sound by striking the strings with magnetic

pickups. This funky sound is popular in black

contemporary music. Because of its unique

structure, the instrument produces a peculiar

sound when you release the keys.

Vibraphone ● ● ●

××

This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet.

The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the

“VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SET-

TING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while

you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when

you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor

inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to

create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this

effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off.

104 CLP-990

Preset Voice List

Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

Marimba ● ● ●

××

This voice simulates a concert-type marimba

sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real

acoustic spread.

Celesta ● ● ●

××

A celesta is a percussive instrument. When

you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a

metallic board to produce the sound. This

instrument is famous for the impressive sound

in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nut-

cracker Suite by Tchaikovsky.

PipeOrganPrincipal ●

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)

organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.

PipeOrganFlute1 ●

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4') of a ﬂute (woodwind instrument) organ.

Its soft sound is suitable for the accompani-

ment of hymns.

PipeOrganFlute2 ●

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+1 1/3') of a ﬂute organ. It sounds more

brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable

for solo performance.

PipeOrganTutti ●

××××

This voice features a full coupler of a pipe

organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta

and Fugue by Bach.

JazzOrgan

×××××

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ.

Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.

Strings ● ●

×××

This voice features a string ensemble that

accurately simulates all string instruments,

including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin.

SynthStrings ● ●

×××

Sampled strings, processed for spread and

warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in

ensemble music.

SlowStrings ● ●

×××

This voice features a string ensemble sound

with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with

piano or electric piano.

Choir ● ●

×××

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating

rich harmonies in slow pieces.

SlowChoir ● ●

×××

This voice features a chorus sound with a slow

attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or

electric piano.

Scat ● ● ●

××

You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.

Depending on how hard and what note range

you play, different sounds will be produced.

CLP-990 105

Voice Combination Examples

(Dual and Split)

Dual

Split

Dual + Split

MAIN + MAIN

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2

This combination is often used in popular music.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2

This combination sounds as if you are playing

two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suit-

able for the accompaniment of Salsa music.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord

This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul

music.

MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination is very suitable for Baroque

music.

MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs

This combination adds strings and bell sound. A

delay effect is automatically applied.

MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano1 / WoodBass

or Bass&Cymbal

This is recommended for light Jazz music. The

damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned

to the right-hand range.

MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir

This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute

song.

MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1

Play these voices elegantly along with piano

arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords

would be more effective.

MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass

This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz

chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding

a variety of expressions.

MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat

Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create

an interesting sound.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano1 + SynthString /

GrandPiano1

This combination creates the thick sound of a

layered piano and strings.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /

ElectricBass

This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb

and chorus (pages 79 and 80) will improve the

groove. The damper pedal is effective on the

voice assigned to the right-hand range.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT

Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /

Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination makes a very brilliant sound.

106 CLP-990

Index

You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.

The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.

Numerics

50 greats for the Clavinova 15

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Practicing a one-hand part 28

Adding reverberation to the sound

→ REVERB 33

Adding variation to the sound

→ Effect function 32

Assigning the START/PAUSE

function to a pedal 89

AUX IN jacks 62

AUX OUT jacks 61

AUX PEDAL jacks 62

Auxiliary pedal function 82

BackUp 91

Bench 15

BRILLIANCE 32

Center pedal 31

Center pedal function 82

Character Code 56

Characters 56

CHORUS 33

combining two voices

→ Dual mode 35

computer 63

Connection

Audio 61

MIDI 66

Other Components 61

Serial 64

Speaker 62

USB 67

Connectors

MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 63, 66

CONTRAST 20

Damper (right) pedal 31

Data Compatibility 101

Data type 59

Default (Normal) setting* 32

Demonstration tunes 24

Detailed Settings 70

Metronome 77

MIDI 83

Other settings 87

recording and playback 74

voices 78

Disk

Copy 55

Format 56

Disk song 50

Display contrast 20

DOWN (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

metronome 40

Dual

Detailed settings 78

Recording 49

Dual mode

→ combining two voices 35

Effect function 32

EXIT 23

EXTRA TRACKS

→ the third or more tracks 46

FactorySet 91

Fast forward 27, 58

FILE 50

Floppy Disk 13, 14

Formatting a floppy disk 56

Headphones 20

HOST SELECT switch 62

Jacks

AUX IN 62

AUX OUT 61

AUX PEDAL 62

PHONES 20

TO HOST 62, 64

LCD → Display

Contrast 20

LCD → Screen 23

Left pedal 31

Left pedal function 82

LEFT voice group buttons 37

List

Demonstration tunes 24

Detailed Settings 70

Message 92

Preset Voice 103

MAIN voice group buttons 30

Maintenance 14

MASTER VOLUME 20

Memory 50

Memory song 50

MemoryBackUp 91

Message List 92

Metronome 40

Detailed settings 77

METRONOME SETTING 77

MIDI 83

Detailed settings 83

MIDI cables 66

MIDI connectors 63, 66

MIDI driver 64

MIDI SETTING 83

Music Data 57

Music stand 18

New Song 41

Normal setting* 32

CLP-990 107

Index

Other settings 87

Pedal Function

Auxiliary 82

Center 82

Left 82

Right 81

Pedals 31

Personal computer 63

PHONES jacks 20

Playback

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Demo Songs 24

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

Playing back repeatedly (song) 76

Playing back repeatedly (specifying the

range) 75

playing two voices → Split mode 37

POWER 19

Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset

songs) 28

PRECAUTIONS 3

Preset song memory 50

Preset Voice List 103

Recording

Tape Recorder 61

Recording in Dual 49

Recording in Split 49

Recording Your Performance 41

Re-recording 43

REVERB 33

Rewind 27, 58

Right pedal 31

Right pedal function 81

Scale 88

Screen 23

Select

50 piano preset songs 26

Demo Songs 24

Recorded Songs and Music Data 57

Selecting a touch response 87

SETTING

metronome 77

Volume 20

SMF (Standard MIDI File) 101

Soft (left) pedal 31

Song

Data Type 59

Delete 53

Detailed settings 74

Playing back repeatedly 76

Rename 54

Store 50

Store (Floopy disk) 53

Store (Storage memory) 53

SONG BALANCE 48

SONG SELECT

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Recorded Songs and Music Data 57

Recording 41

SONG SETTING 74

Sostenuto (center) pedal 31

Sound

brilliance 32

expression 32

reverberation 33

spread and spaciousness 33

Soundboard reverb 33

Split

Detailed settings 78

Recording 49

Split mode → playing two voices 37

Split point 38

Splitting the keyboard range and

playing two different voices 37

START/PAUSE

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

Recording 42

START/STOP

metronome 40

STOP

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

Recording 42

Storage memory 50

StringResonance 88

SustainSampling 88

Synchro Start

50 preset songs 28

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

TEMPO

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

metronome 40

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

the third or more tracks

→ EXTRA TRACKS 46

TO HOST jack 62, 64

TouchResponse 87

Track playback on and off 59

TRACK1/TRACK2

50 Piano Preset Songs 28

Recording 41, 45

TRANSPOSE 34

Transposition 34

Troubleshooting 100

Tune 87

Type of characters 56

Type of data (recorded) 97

UP (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

metronome 40

VOICE SETTING 78

Voices 30

Detailed settings 78

Volume

Balance (SONG BLANCE) 48

Setting 20

XG 102

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,

tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO

NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or

at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product

or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are

stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA

PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America,

Keyboard Division

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3486-0011

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria

3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[CL] 21

Owner’s manual

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage

matches the voltage specified on the name

plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a

voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom

panel of the main keyboard unit near the power

cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set

for the voltage in your area. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”

screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that

the correct voltage appears next to the pointer

on the panel.

CLP-990/CLP-990M

Owner’s manual

M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation

V?????? ???AP?????.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia

Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Clavinova Web Site (English only)

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

CLP-990

CLP-990M

Documenttranscriptie

IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. CLP-990 CLP-990M Owner’s manual SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. CLP-990/990M Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. (1) B-6 CLP-990 3 PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover gap. • Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. (1) B-6 4 CLP-990 PRECAUTIONS ■ USING THE BENCH (If included) • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. ■ SAVING USER DATA • Always save data to a floppy disk or an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 frequently, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the instrument and the handles located on the rear. Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Key cover Speaker box (1) B-6 CLP-990 5 Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-990/990M. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on page 16, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97, or the “Index” on page 106. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. Reference Booklet: XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The models CLP-990M will be referred to as the CLP-990 in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser’s personal use is prohibited. ■ Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ 6 CLP-990 Table of contents Introduction.......................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6 Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. .............................. 11 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk ...................................................................... 13 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 15 Features ................................................................................................................................................ 16 Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 18 Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 19 Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 20 Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Basic Operation .................................................. 21 Part Names ........................................................................................................................................... 22 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 24 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 26 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 26 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 28 Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 30 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 30 Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 31 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 32 Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 34 Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 35 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 37 Using the metronome ................................................................................................................................................... 40 Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 41 Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 41 Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 41 Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 43 Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 44 Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 45 Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 46 Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 46 Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 46 CLP-990 7 Table of contents Changing a voice or tempo after recording ........................................................................................................... 47 Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 48 Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] ...................................................................... 50 Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 50 Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 51 Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 52 Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] .................................................................................. 53 Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong]......................................................... 53 Renaming a song...[RenameSong] ............................................................................................................................... 54 Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] .................................................................................... 55 Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] .................................................................................................................... 56 Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 56 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 57 Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 57 Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 59 Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59 Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 61 Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 61 Connecting a personal computer ................................................................................................................................. 63 Detailed Settings ................................................ 69 Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 70 Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 70 Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 72 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 74 Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 74 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] ...................................... 75 Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 75 Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 75 Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 75 Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] ................................................................... 76 Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 76 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 77 Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 77 Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 77 Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 77 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 78 Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 78 Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 78 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 79 Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] ................................................................................................. 79 Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] ....................................................................................................................... 79 Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* ...................................................................................................................... 79 8 CLP-990 Table of contents Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 80 Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 80 Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 80 Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 80 Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 81 Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 81 Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 81 Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 82 Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] ....................................................................................................................... 82 Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 82 MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 83 About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 83 Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 84 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 84 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 85 Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 85 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 85 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 85 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 86 Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 86 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] ...................................................................................... 86 Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 86 Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 87 Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 87 Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 87 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] ............................................................................... 87 Selecting a scale [Scale] ................................................................................................................................................. 88 Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 88 Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 88 Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 89 Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode].............................................................................................................................................. 89 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 89 Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 89 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 90 Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 90 Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 90 Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 91 Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 91 Other method for restoring the normal settings ......................................................................................................... 91 Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 92 Questions about Operations and Functions ........................................................................................ 97 CLP-990 9 Table of contents Appendix ............................................................ 99 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 100 Data Compatibility ............................................................................................................................. 101 Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 103 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 105 Index................................................................................................................................................... 106 10 CLP-990 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Listening Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24 “Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26 Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24 Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26 Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 41 “Playing back a song” on page 57 Listening to songs in a floppy disk............................................................. “Playing back a song” on page 57 Playing Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 31 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 34 Changing tonal color Viewing the list of voices ................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 103 Simulating a concert hall........................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 33 Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 35 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ........................... “Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 37 Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 32 Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 33 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 28 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 40 Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 41 “Turning track playback on and off ” on page 59 Recording Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 41 Saving recorded songs to floppy disks or memory ...........................................................“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 50 CLP-990 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Settings Making detailed settings for recording and playback ............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 74 Making detailed settings for the metronome ......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 77 Making detailed settings for the voices ................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 78 Making detailed settings for MIDI .................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83 Making detailed settings for the Clavinova .........................................................“Other settings” on page 87 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 83 Recording your performance ..................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61 Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 61 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova .......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 62 Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 Quick solution What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11 “Features” on page 16 Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 23 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting ................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 91 Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 92 If you have questions about operations and functions .............................................................................. “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 100 12 CLP-990 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk Precautions Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the floppy disk drive is stopped. If the disk drive is operating (during the [SaveToDisk] (P53), [DeleteSong] (P53), [RenameSong] (P54), [CopyDisk] (P55), or [FormatDisk] (P56) operation), the Clavinova displays [Executing]. Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the disk drive is operating. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Eject button CLP-990 13 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk About the Floppy Disks • To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): • To handle floppy disks with care: • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. write-protect tab open (protect position) • Data backup • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Copy Disk function on page 55. Maintenance Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well). Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber products on the instrument. Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded. Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you first open the package. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like. 14 CLP-990 Included Accessories “50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection Owner’s Manual Recording disk Save your recorded performance to this disk. (page 53) Bench (included or optional depending on locale) Reference Booklet CLP-990 15 Features The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-990 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical voices, and a special “NL Keyboard (Natural Keyboard)” that uses wooden keys with a new action mechanism for improved continuous key response. The CLP-990 GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from each key of a full concert grand piano. The CLP-990 GrandPiano1 voice features five velocityswitched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a “Soundboard Reverb” (page 33) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Resonance” (page 88) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 88)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-990 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX NEW SONG SONG BALANCE TRANSPOSE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG VOICE SETTING LEFT D C TEMPO EFFECT VOICE POWER PHONES Connect an optional pedal here and assign one of the various functions to the pedal. (page 62) IN OUT THRU L / L+R PC-2 MIDI MIDI A set of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice. (page 20) HOST SELECT TO HOST This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications. (page 62-67) Connect a MIDI device here to use various MIDI functions. (page 63, 66) (About MIDI—page 83) 16 CLP-990 R L / L+R R PC-1 Mac AUX PEDAL AUX IN AUX OUT Connect recording equipment (such as a cassette tape recorder) here to record your performance. (page 61) These jacks allow you to connect an external tone generator to reproduce the sound via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. (page 62) Features The display allows accurate control and operation. (page 23) The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs. This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice using a convenient practice function, play back Clavinova music data (sold in music stores), and record and play back your performance. (page 26, 41, 57) MAIN voice gruop buttons Select voices from 25 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1. (page 30) You can also combine two voices at a time. (page 35) [FILE] Save recorded songs and manage song files. (page 50) [METRONOME] Use the metronome functions. (page 40) [DEMO] Demonstration playback is available for each voice. (page 24) DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING [MIDI SETTING] Make detailed MIDI settings, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels. (page 83) METRONOME START/STOP SETTING [CONTRAST] Adjust the brightness of the display using this control. (page 20) B A [REVERB]/ [CHORUS] Add reverb (reverberation) and spread (chorus) to the sound. (page 33) CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME [MASTER VOLUME] Adjust the volume level using this slider. (page 20) SONG TEMPO [SONG SETTING] Make detailed settings for song recording and playback. (page 74) TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same keys. (page 34) D C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] You can change the song tempo (speed). (page 27, 40, 42, 58) VOICE EFFECT [EXIT] The screen returns to its main display when you press this button. (page 23) [VOICE SETTING] You can make detailed settings for tone and effects. (page 78) LEFT voice group buttons/ [SPLIT POINT] You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. (page 37) BRILLIANCE [ ][ ] Adjust the brightness of the tone using these buttons. (page 32) [OTHER SETTING] Fine-tune the touch response and pitch, etc. (page 87) CLP-990 17 Before Using the Clavinova Key cover To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. Adjusting the music stand angle Changing the angle Grasp the bottom of the stand and lift the stand while pulling it toward you. The stand locks at various angles when you hear a click . Be careful not to pinch your fngers! Replacing the stand to its original position Raise the bottom of the stand until the stand becomes horizontal. Then lower the stand while supporting the bottom. • When you adjust the music stand angle, be sure to hold the bottom part, not the upper part or the sides. Use caution not to pinch anyone’s fingers, especially those of young children, between the stand and the unit. • Do not adjust the angle with sheet music or other objects resting on the stand. Otherwise, the objects may fall and cause injury. • Do not place heavy objects on the music stand. Doing so may damage the music stand, or may cause injury. 18 CLP-990 Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on 1. Connect the power cable. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1 The power connector is located on the lower part of the rear panel. 2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) WARNING! Make sure your CLP-990 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-990. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-990 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-990. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. • The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. TIP Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. [POWER] switch Power indicator A B NO C YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. • The screen and the power indicator turn off. CLP-990 19 Before Using the Clavinova Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. Use this knob. A CONTRAST B NO YES TERMINOLOGY CONTRAST: difference between brightness and darkness EXIT C D Setting the volume While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of the front panel to the left or right. MIN MAX Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MASTER VOLUME The level decreases. The level increases. TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX IN input level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) PHONES bottom surface standard stereo phone plug 20 CLP-990 TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. Basic Operation 21 CLP-990 CLP-990 21 Part Names D H F A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS L M O REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING VOICE SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING K N STRINGS/ CHOIR MAIN NO YES SPLIT POINT EXIT C LEFT D G E CLP-990 MIN 7 3 5 DEMO SONG SELECT MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE 4 6 VOICE I J EFFECT P B 8 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN UP SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME 2 DEMO CLP-970 0 SONG 9 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A A B TEMPO C CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING ] LEFT D VOICE EFFECT POWER 1 A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 PHONES Center “C” Q R S T Top panel 1 [POWER]..............................................P19 2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P20 3 [DEMO] ...............................................P24 4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P34 5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P26, 41, 57 6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P48 7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] / section .................................................P30 I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P38 J Voice group buttons for the LEFT [EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 59 section .................................................P37 8 [FILE] ...................................................P50 9 SONG [STOP] / K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P78 L [REVERB]..............................................P33 M [CHORUS] ............................................P33 N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P32 O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P83 P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P87 Q [PHONES] ............................................P20 R Soft pedal ............................................P31 S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P31 T Damper pedal .....................................P31 [START/PAUSE] .......................P26, 42, 58 0 [REC]....................................................P42 A [SONG SETTING] ................................P74 B METRONOME [START/STOP] / [SETTING]......................................P40, 77 C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P27, 40, 42, 58 D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] / C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P23 22 E LCD screen ..........................................P23 F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P20 G [EXIT]...................................................P23 H Voice group buttons for the MAIN CLP-990 Part Names Connectors U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P61 V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P62 W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P62 X [TO HOST] ..........................................P62 IN OUT Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P62 Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P63 THRU L / L+R PC-2 MIDI MIDI R L / L+R R PC-1 Mac HOST SELECT TO HOST Y AUX PEDAL X AUX IN AUX OUT V U W Z \ Floppy disk drive................................. P13 ] Panel logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. \ uppee left on the front board XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. D LCD buttons E LCD Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD. Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit. A B NO C YES D G[EXIT] button When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on). CLP-990 23 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups. Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs. Demonstration tunes Voice group Tunes PIANO E.PIANO/BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/CHOIR Composer Chanson de l’adieu Original Le Coucou Original Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2 Original F.F. Chopin – L.C. Daguin – G.F. Händel – 23 14 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS MAIN voice group buttons STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 4 Procedure 1. Engage the demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in sequence. A B NO C 2. YES D Select a tune and start playback. Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired demonstration tune. The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO → E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN → STRINGS/CHOIR). 24 CLP-990 TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE To adjust the volume level of the demo songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Listening to the Demonstration Tunes 3. 4. Stop the playback. Press the button of the voice group being played or the [STOP] button. Exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo mode. CLP-990 25 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 26) or use them for practice (page 28). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Playing the 50 piano preset songs 1 DEMO CLP-990 METRONOME [START/STOP] SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG 3 2 TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 4 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Select a song. Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. Song select screen A B NO C TERMINOLOGY Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. YES D The song number appears on the display. 2. Play a preset song. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. the number of measures A B NO C YES D TIP • You can also use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song after pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. • [P-000: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance. (See page 41.) • Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. (See page 76.) TIP You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. 26 CLP-990 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song select screen. A B NO C 3. YES TIP You can also use the D[–]/[+] buttons to change the tempo. NOTE Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. D Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: • Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 4. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 30) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. CLP-990 27 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2]. 1 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 3 2 procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/ PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. 28 CLP-990 TERMINOLOGY Synchro: Synchronous;occurring at the same time Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 75. CLP-990 29 Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices 1 2 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice group. Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row). TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 24). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 103 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. TERMINOLOGY Voice On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” Voice group PIANO E.PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD 30 CLP-990 Voice name GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' ElectricClavichord Voice group MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR Voice name Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 103. Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Damper (right) pedal When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. h q q. q. . When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. h q q. q. . TIP If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the RPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu is set to ON (see page 81). TIP You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu. (See page 88.) When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 82.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “R Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L Pedal” parameters in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. (See page 81, 82.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/stop operation (START/PAUSE function) via the “PedalStart/Pause” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu (on page 89). CLP-990 31 Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [REVERB] [CHORUS] DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B NO C YES D Dark.................... Dark tone Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone Normal ............... Standard tone Bright ................. Bright tone Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. TIP You can also use the D [–]/ [+] buttons after you press one of the [BRILLIANCE] buttons to select the desired option. TIP Normal setting = Normal TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE If you select [Bright] or [Metallic] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. 32 CLP-990 Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 79.) TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 80). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 80.) TIP Normal Setting The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. CLP-990 33 Selecting and Playing Voices Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance. DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO 13 C D 2 VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 34 Procedure 1. Display the Transpose screen. Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES TERMINOLOGY Transpose: Changing the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. D Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song. Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song. Manual ............... Your manual performance Song .................... Playback song 3. Set the transposition amount. Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons to set the transposition amount. To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] buttons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously. 4. 34 CLP-990 Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TIP The transposition range is from “–12 semitones” (down one octave) through “0” (normal pitch) to “12 semitones” (up one octave). Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations. The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different groups. DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING 2 METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING MAIN voice 2 A B 1 3 group buttons PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. C LEFT D 2 VOICE SETTING 3 VOICE 14 EFFECT MAIN voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simultaneously. A B NO C D 1st voice 2. YES 2nd voice Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 103 are called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd voices. 3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. CLP-990 35 Selecting and Playing Voices Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure 1. 2. 3. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group button. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. Select another voice. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly. A B NO C 4. 36 CLP-990 YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. Selecting and Playing Voices Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 105 for examples of effective voice combinations. 2 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING 2 A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT 4 VOICE 4 135 EFFECT LEFT voice group buttons Procedure 1. Enter Split mode. Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row). A B NO C 2. 3. YES D Select a voice for the right hand. Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A [–]/[+] buttons. Select a voice for the left hand. Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C [–]/[+] buttons. CLP-990 37 Selecting and Playing Voices Voice group MAIN PIANO LEFT PIANO/E.PIANO E.PIANO/BASS BASS HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS STRINGS/CHOIR 4. F2 CLP-990 GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' EcelctricClavichord Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat Specify the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range). I The normal setting of the split point is “F 2.” 38 Voice name Center “C” TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. Selecting and Playing Voices To change the split point setting: Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B NO C YES D Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the voice group button that you pressed for the lefthand range. In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 35) for the MAIN and LEFT ranges respectively. A B NO C YES D CLP-990 39 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. 12 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo TIP The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. A B NO C YES D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. 40 CLP-990 Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 77.) Recording Your Performance TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT connector. (see page 61.) This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the leftand right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song Recording to [TRACK 1] 2 3 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT 1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 5 35 46 Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. Press the SONG SELECT [ neously. ][ ] buttons simulta- New Song screen A B NO C NOTE If you select a song other than “P-000: NewSong” and record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. YES D CLP-990 41 Recording Your Performance 2. 3. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 30). NOTE Set the tempo in Step 3. Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the New Song screen. NOTE See page 49 for more information on recording in Dual/ Split mode. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B NO C YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once. 4. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Record screen A B NO C YES TIP You can record data while using the metronome. The metronome is not recorded. TIP When you press the [START/PAUSE] button during recording, recording is paused. To resume recording, press the [START/ PAUSE] button again or play a note on the keyboard. D Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is automatically cancelled.) 42 CLP-990 TIP When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. Recording Your Performance 5. Play back the recorded performance. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. NOTE To erase recorded data from a track, use the Channel Clear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu. (See page 75.) When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the SaveToMemory parameter (page 52) or SaveToDisk parameter (page 53) in the File menu. Re-recording TRACK 1 This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previous settings. Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 42 to re-record. The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data. CLP-990 43 Recording Your Performance Re-recording TRACK 1 partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Procedure 1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Playback screen A B NO C 2. 3. 3-1 YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previous settings. Select the recording method and enter record mode. Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should end. While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select screen appears. A B NO C YES D Starting methods: Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. 44 CLP-990 NOTE If the playback screen is not displayed, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons once. Recording Your Performance Ending methods: Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain. 3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. TIP If you cancel recording by pressing the [REC] button, recording stops when you press the button. If you cancel recording by pressing the [STOP] button, the Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42. Recording to [TRACK2] This section explains how to record another part on the second track. 1 2 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 2 Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Repeat Step 2 on page 42. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 2] button. The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) TIP Pressing the [TRACK 1] button repeatedly toggles between playback on (the indicator lights up in green) and off (the indicator turns off). Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42. You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data. CLP-990 45 Recording Your Performance Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one. Procedure 1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Recording to [TRACK2]” on page 45 and use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select a recording track (3–16). select a recording track (3-16) A B NO C 2. YES D While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 42. Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data [see page 60], or your old recorded performances [see page 50]). Procedure 1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050). Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000: NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on page 41. To select a song from commercial music data sold in stores or from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 57. NOTE If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 41 to 46. 46 CLP-990 Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/ [+] buttons. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E. Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the track to change. The indicator for the selected track lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. TIP Refer to “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 97 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The edited settings (except for the tempo setting) will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. CLP-990 47 Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Procedure 1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES D Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons. To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [–] button. To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [+] button. Setting range: 127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound) 127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound) Normal setting: 127:127 48 CLP-990 TIP Commercially-available song data contains a large amount of data. If you are using such songs, be sure to adjust the song balance. TIP The song balance setting is also used during playback. (See page 57.) Recording Your Performance Recording in Dual or Split mode When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The following table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice. CAUTION When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 46), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording. Tracks assigned for recording Tracks used for recording Dual Split Split+Dual TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ MAIN (1st voice) TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn LEFT (1st voice) – MAIN (2nd voice) TRACK3 LEFT (2nd voice) – TRACK4 TRACKn +2 TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1 – TRACK3 TRACKn +2 – TRACK4 TRACKn +3 Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used. TIP Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. CLP-990 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files (e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), copy and format disks, and change the characters on the screen. The following parameters are provided for these operations: Settings Parameter name Reference page Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 52 Saves recorded and other songs on floppy disks SaveToDisk 53 Deletes song data from Clavinova memory or floppy disk DeleteSong 53 Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 54 Copies data from floppy disk to floppy disk CopyDisk 55 Formats a floppy disk FormatDisk 56 Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 56 Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: • Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. • Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. • Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded from floppy disk. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, Storage memory, or floppy disk, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Storage memory or on a floppy disk (see page 52, 53). In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song,” and a song on a floppy disk is a “Disk song.” Clavinova Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT POWER Floppy disk 50 CLP-990 TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Memory Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Formatting (Initializing) Floppy disks are a convenient media that allow you to save various data for personal computers and other devices. There are many ways (formats) to save data on floppy disks, depending on the device. Therefore, you need to prepare a floppy disk by assigning a format before you can use it on a particular type of device. This operation is called “formatting.” Character code Type of characters Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 92 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. [FILE] DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. Select a song, or have a floppy disk ready. 2. Access the File menu. Select a song you wish to save or rename. (Optional) Insert a floppy disk for copying or formatting into the disk drive. Press the [FILE] button. A B NO C YES D To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. 5. Close the File menu. Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item from the following: “SaveToMemory”, “SaveToDisk,” “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CopyDisk”, “FormatDisk”, “CharacterCode”. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-990 51 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory] If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory or to a floppy disk. (To save a song to a floppy disk, refer to the next section [SaveToDisk].) You can also save the preset songs, disk songs, and additional or overwriting recordings (page 46) to Storage memory. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Name the song. To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→” “Sure?→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.) The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the operation. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears. The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means “Memory” and “xx” is a number. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 52 CLP-990 TIP • You can change the type of characters on the screen using the CharacterCode parameter. • When you select a saved song later, the name with an extension “.MID” will appear. TERMINOLOGY “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] You can save recorded songs, preset songs, Memory songs, and additional or overwriting recordings (page 46) songs onto a floppy disk. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4. Make sure that a formatted floppy disk (page 56) is inserted in the disk drive. Follow the steps for the [SaveToMemory] operation (see page 52) to name and save the song. The song is automatically numbered as “Dxx,” where “D” means “Disk” and “xx” is a number. TIP The song data is saved in the SMF format (format 0). Therefore, you can play the disk on instruments that support the SMF format. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong] You can delete Memory songs and Disk songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. TIP To delete a Current song, select “ALL” for the ChannelClear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 75). Alternatively, press the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons simultaneously to display “Song Changed Save?”. This means “A song has been edited. Do you wish to save the change?” Press the B [– (NO)] button. The Current song is deleted and a blank “NewSong” is selected. CLP-990 53 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] 4-1 Select a song to delete. TIP If you select a Memory song or Disk song, deleting the song does not erase song data from Current memory. However, if you return to the song select screen, song information other than the song name is replaced by “--------------”. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. TIP After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” Renaming a song...[RenameSong] You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong]. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory] section (page 52). CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” TIP After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 54 CLP-990 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] You can copy the entire contents of one floppy disk to another floppy disk. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4-1 Make sure that a formatted floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” 4-3 When the screen indicates “Insrt Target Disk”, eject the source disk and insert the destination disk. When the copy operation is complete, the Clavinova displays “Completed.” TIP Use the same type of disk (2DD or 2HD) for the destination disk as the source disk. TERMINOLOGY Insrt Target Disk: Insert the destination (target) disk. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” CLP-990 55 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] You can format a floppy disk so that it can be used with the Clavinova. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 51 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4-1 Make sure that the formatted floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B NO C Options: International, Japanese Character list [International] [Japanese] 56 CLP-990 YES D Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data TIP See page 59 for information on the types of song data that can be played on the Clavinova. You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 41) as well as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. Playing back a song To play back a song from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the disk drive. 1 2-2 DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT 2-1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO LEFT D 2-2 43 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] C VOICE SETTING VOICE EFFECT 5 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Display the song select screen. Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons. Song select screen A B NO C 2. 2-1 YES D Select the desired song. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “PresetSong,” “MemorySong,” or “DiskSong.” If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavinova displays “MemorySong.” If a floppy disk that contains song data is inserted in the drive, the Clavinova displays “DiskSong.” 2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ to select a song. TIP You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a fourhanded song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. ]/[ TIP Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 76) to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. ] buttons CLP-990 57 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 3. Start playback. Press the [START/PAUSE] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B NO C YES ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. 4. 58 CLP-990 TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. (See page 48.) Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP In the song select screen: • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. Eject the floppy disk from the disk drive if you have been playing a disk song. Turning track playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. TIP When the Clavinova plays back commercially-available music data or recordings from other instruments, all track indicators may light up green regardless of whether or not all tracks contains data. TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the FromToRepeat (page 75) and PhraseMark parameters (page 76) in the “SONG SETTING” menu. Supported song data type Data formats that can be played on the CLP-990 The Clavinova CLP-990 plays song data in the following formats: Floppy disk format 3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format 3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format TERMINOLOGY Disk format: A structured method for writing data to disk. Sequence format SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1 ESEQ Performance data recorded on the CLP-990 is saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk. TERMINOLOGY Sequence format: A structured method for recording performance data. CLP-990 59 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data Voice arrangement format XG voice arrangement GM system level 1 voice arrangement DOC voice arrangement Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-990 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. The CLP-990 provides XG voices for song playback, as well as preset voices. See page 6 of the separate “Reference Booklet” for the XG voice list. Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 101 for more information on formats. Song data recorded on other instruments When you play on the CLP-990 song data recorded on the Clavinova CVP109, 107, 105, 103, 98, 96, 94, 92, or CLP-870, you may notice a slight difference in volume balance, although the voices sound almost identical. You can also play back song data from the Yamaha Disklavier player piano. 60 CLP-990 TERMINOLOGY Voice arrangement format: A structured method for numbering the voices for assignment. Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. IN OUT THRU L / L+R PC-2 MIDI MIDI R L / L+R HOST SELECT TO HOST AUX PEDAL 5 4 3 6 AUX IN AUX OUT 2 1 1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova L / L+R R cassette tape recorder stereo system AUX OUT phone plug (standard) RCA phono →phone adapter plug AUX OUT alternatively R PC-1 Mac RCA phono plug CAUTION Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jacks is output from the AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing audio oscillation and abnormal playback, leading to malfunction of both pieces of equipment. TIP Use audio cables and adapter plugs with no resistance. AUX IN RCA phono plug audio cable TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting does not affect the signal output from the AUX OUT jacks. CLP-990 61 Connections 2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova L / L+R R Plug shape depends on the divece. AUX IN AUX OUT (OUTPUT) AUX IN phone plug (standard) Tone Generator audio cable 3 AUX PEDAL jack Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here. Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button function to this foot switch. (See page 89.) 4 TO HOST jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) 5 HOST SELECT switch This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) 62 CLP-990 TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and [BRILLIANCE] (page 32) settings do not. TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. Connections 6 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page) to MIDI when you use these connectors. Connecting a personal computer You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI) jack. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments): http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ (You need to register first. Check the Clavinova web page.) There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 64) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 66) 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 67) For more information, refer to the following pages. TIP When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. TIP If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. TIP When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO HOST jack. CLP-990 63 Connections 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface. Connection Use a special serial cable (page 65) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. Clavinova PC-2 MIDI PC-1 Mac HOST SELECT TO HOST TO HOST RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin) modem port Windows Windows Macintosh Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com 64 CLP-990 Connections Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables. • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 8 (CTS) 7 (RTS) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) 3 4 8 5 D-sub 9-pin • Macintosh System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 (TxD) • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent) 2 (HSK i) mini DIN 1 (HSK O) 8-pin 5 (RxD-) 4 (GND) 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP-) 6 (TxD+) • Pin assignment The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable. Pin numbers (view from front) mini DIN 8-pin 1 2 3 4 8 5 5 (CTS) 4 (RTS) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) D-sub 25-pin mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 4 3 2 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 9 8 7 6 2 (TxD) Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer. • Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock) • Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps) TIP If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.) CLP-990 65 Connections 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors Connection Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. Clavinova IN OUT THRU PC-2 MIDI MIDI MIDI IN HOST SELECT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT PC-1 Mac MIDI IN MIDI interface MIDI interface Windows Macintosh Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” 66 CLP-990 Connections 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or MIDI cables. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256. UX256 Yamaha USB-MIDI interface. Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable PC-1 Mac or TO HOST HOST SELECT USB cable Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING B A CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME VOICE SETTING LEFT D C TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables IN OUT MIDI USB cable MIDI HOST SELECT MIDI cables computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT POWER CLP-990 67 68 CLP-990 Detailed Settings CLP-990 69 Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 72 for the normal (default) setting for each parameter. Parameter List The following parameters are available. Recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Settings Correcting note timing Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing Auditioning the channels Deleting data by each channel Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number Playing back a song repeatedly Parameter name Reference page Quantize 74 QuickPlay 75 ChannelListen ChannelClear FromToRepeat 75 75 75 PhraseMark 76 SongRepeat 76 Metronome METRONOME [SETTING] Settings Metronome time signature Metronome volume level Metronome voice Parameter name TimeSignature MetronomeVolume MetronomeSound Reference page 77 77 77 Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Settings Octave* Volume level* Position of right and left channels* Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Reverb type Reverb depth* Chorus type Chorus depth* Chorus on/off Variation effect type Variation effect depth* Touch sensitivity* 70 CLP-990 Parameter name Octave Volume Pan Detune ReverbType ReverbSend ChorusType ChorusSend ChorusOnOff VariationType VariationSend TouchSense Reference page 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 80 80 80 81 81 Detailed Settings Right pedal function Center pedal function Left pedal function Auxiliary pedal function RPedal MPedal LPedal AuxPedal 81 82 82 82 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Settings MIDI transmit channel MIDI receive channel (Port A) MIDI receive channel (Port B) Local control on/off Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission Type of data received via MIDI Type of data transmitted via MIDI Song data bulk dump Transmitting the initial settings Voice data bulk dump Parameter name Reference page MidiOutChannel MidiInAChannel MidiInBChannel LocalControl 84 84 85 85 MidiOutSelect 85 ReceiveParameter TransmitParameter SongBulkDump InitialSetup VoiceBulkDump 85 86 86 86 86 [OTHER SETTING] Settings Selecting a touch response Fine tuning of the pitch Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice Selecting a scale Depth of string resonance Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound Pitch bend range Replacing the preset voices with XG voices Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown Restoring the normal (default) settings Parameter name Reference page TouchResponse Tune PianoTuningCurve Scale StringResonanceDepth SustainSamplingDepth VivraphoneRotorSpeed VibraphonePedalMode PedalStart/Pause AuxPedalType 87 87 87 88 88 88 89 89 89 89 HalfPedalPoint 90 PitchBendRange XGAlternative MemoryBackUp FactorySet 90 90 91 91 CLP-990 71 Detailed Settings Making detailed settings METRONOME [SETTING] A [–] [+] DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING B [– (NO) ] [+ (YES) ] A B PIANO CONTRAST [MIDI SETTING] E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO [SONG SETTING] C C [–] [+] VOICE SETTING LEFT D D [–] [+] VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] [OTHER SETTING] Procedure 1. Access a setting menu. Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING], or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. 3. Select the desired parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly as required. Set the parameter or part. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. 72 CLP-990 Detailed Settings 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B [+(YES)] button. A B NO C YES D If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. A B NO C 5. YES D Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-990 73 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”), memory songs (“MemorySong”), or disk songs (“DiskSong”) (see page 57). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT [SONG SETTING] Correcting note timing [Quantize] You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively (with a swing type of rhythm). • Changes are made by song. • You can also listen to the sound while changing the setting. To change the data, you need to respond to “Execute?→.” See the procedure on page 72. Stores the changed value. A If you select “1/8” for correction: Performance data Swing rate = 50% : not swinging Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed. Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly early. B NO C YES D Swing rate = 67% : The timing of the even beat notes is moved to the third beat of the triplets. 3 Specifies the type of note. Notes for which you can adjust the timing: [OFF] [1/4] quarter note [1/8] eighth note [1/16] sixteenth note 3 [1/12] eighth note triplets 3 [1/24] sixteenth note triplets If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavinova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging. Setting range: 0% - 100% 74 CLP-990 TIP Save the edited song data to memory or a disk. (See page 50.) 3 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 72. Press this button to delete data. A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for deletion. YES Setting range: D Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels) Setting range: [On] Playing from the first note [Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 72. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. A B NO C Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear] YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for playback. TIP • Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. However, for some songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. • Save the edited song data to memory or disk. (See page 50.) Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to play back repeatedly. • Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat specified as the end point. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified part until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts. See the procedure on page 72. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16 TIP Usually, channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. However, for some songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. A B NO C Use these buttons to specify the start point of the repeated range. YES D Use these buttons to specify the end point of the repeated range. NOTE When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off. CLP-990 75 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers in the score to play back from the score from the mark point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified phrase until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts from the specified phrase. See the procedure on page 72. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” A You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the floppy disks. • When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [STOP] button. See the procedure on page 72. Use these buttons to select “On.” A B NO C D YES Setting range: [DiskSongs] C D Use these buttons to specify the phrase number. Setting range of the phrase number: Off (not specified) 1 - the last phrase number of the song If you select any song other than those from the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.” 76 CLP-990 YES Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs. B NO Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] All songs in the floppy disk inserted in the disk drive [MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory [Disk+Memory] All songs from “DiskSongs” and “MemorySongs” [PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs [ALL] All songs from “DiskSongs,” “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” [OneSong] One song selected from the front panel Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. METRONOME [SETTING] DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature] LEFT VOICE EFFECT Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] See the procedure on page 72. See the procedure on page 72. A A B NO C Use these buttons to set the numerator of the time signature. D VOICE SETTING B NO YES C D Use these buttons to set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.” Setting range for the numerator: 1 - 16 Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, and 8 YES D Setting range: [BellOff] [EnglishVoice] [GermanVoice] [JapaneseVoice] [FrenchVoice] [SpanishVoice] [BellOn] Click (standard metronome sound) Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish Click and bell TIP To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 0-127 CLP-990 77 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] 2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) [Main × Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) [Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) [Left × Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) TIP In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Setting the octave [Octave]* You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO YES Setting the volume level [Volume]* You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C C In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: –2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two octaves higher) 78 CLP-990 YES D D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: In Dual mode: A B NO C YES –20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) D Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2) Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] Setting range: 0 - 127 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 72. A TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “LeftXLayer.” See the procedure on page 72. A B NO YES B NO YES C D Setting range: C D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Room Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal plate. Setting range: L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right) Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] TIP The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected for Dual mode. See the procedure on page 72. A See the procedure on page 72. A B B NO NO C C YES YES D D CLP-990 79 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode: In Dual mode: A B NO C A B YES D NO C Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: Setting range: 0 - 127 0 - 127 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type] TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff] You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES See the procedure on page 72. D A Setting range: Chorus Celeste Flanger TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. Adds a rich, spacious sound. Adds swell and a spacious sound. Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. B NO C YES D Setting range: On/Off Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] See the procedure on page 72. A B NO YES You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 72. A C B D NO C 80 CLP-990 YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. DelayLR Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo Echo-like delay CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed. Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid cycles. VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. Off No effect. Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* See the procedure on page 72. A Setting range: 0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loudest and fixed) B NO C YES Setting the right pedal function [RPedal] D See the procedure on page 72. In Dual mode: A A B B NO NO C C D D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 YES YES Setting range: SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. Sustain On/Off switch type damper function. PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Off No function. Normal setting: SustainCount CLP-990 81 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] See the procedure on page 72. A You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 72. B NO Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] YES A C NO D Setting range: Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Sostenuto Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] See the procedure on page 72. A B NO B YES C YES D Setting range: Expression Sustain Makes the sound softer or louder. On/Off switch type damper function. (See page 31.) SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. (See page 31.) PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 31.) Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal setting: C D Setting range: Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 31.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and VibraPhone) Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) 82 CLP-990 Expression TIP Optional pedals • Yamaha FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, and PitchBend. • Yamaha FC4 foot controller Yamaha FC5 foot controller These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor. MIDI [MIDI SETTING] You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. MIDI connectors IN OUT THRU PC-2 MIDI MIDI PC-1 Mac HOST SELECT MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is. TIP Prepare dedicated MIDI cables. [TO HOST] connector Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer. PC-2 MIDI PC-1 Mac HOST SELECT TO HOST TIP The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 63 for more information. Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart is listed on pages 31 and 32 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-990. When you are using the MIDI connectors, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “MIDI.” (See page 63.) TIP When you are using the [TO HOST] connector, set the [HOST SELECT] switch correctly, according to the type of computer you are using. (See page 63.) You can also obtain detailed information about MIDI from various music magazines and books. CLP-990 83 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Procedure Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode. [MIDI SETTING] DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C Select a voice part. VOICE See the procedure on page 72. A B YES D Specify the channel. NO C Select a channel. Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Setting range: Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) On/Off Normal setting: Normal setting: Main — Ch1 Left — Ch2 Layer — Ch3 Left Layer— Ch4 On for all channels Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s port A). YES D Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer CLP-990 EFFECT TIP The received data is played back using the XG voices (page 6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-990). You can also assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See “XG Alternative” on page 90.) Setting for: 84 VOICE SETTING LEFT D Select On or Off. MIDI data MIDI IN TO HOST Port A Port B Sound source A Channels 1-16 Sound source B Channels 1-16 Used for song playback Used for performance and playback MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s port B). TIP The received data is played back using the preset voices (page 103). See the procedure on page 72. A Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: On Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect] You can select whether your performance data or song playback data (including demo songs) is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 72. B A NO B YES NO C D C Select a channel. YES D Select On or Off. Setting range: Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard) Song (song playback data) Setting range: Normal setting: On/Off Keyboard Normal setting: On for all channels Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl] “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 72. A C A B NO C Select a type of data. YES D Select On or Off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off B NO This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 72. YES Normal setting: On for all types of data D CLP-990 85 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 72. D A Select a type of data. Select On or Off. B NO YES Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: Normal setting: On for all types of data You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice Setting” menu (page 78) as MIDI bulk data. You can interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 72. Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump] You can save current song data on the Clavinova as MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the usual playback procedure. You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO 86 CLP-990 D Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump] On/Off C C YES D A B NO C YES D Other settings You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode. DEMO CLP-990 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [OTHER SETTING] Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] Fine tuning the pitch [Tune] You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 72. You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 72. A A B B NO NO C C D D Setting range: Light YES YES With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium Standard touch response. Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the volume level. Setting range: A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps) Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 72. A B Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: NO 1 - 127 C YES D Setting range: Stretch Flat Tuning curve particularly for pianos Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range CLP-990 87 Other settings If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons. Selecting a scale [Scale] You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 72. A YES Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are sometimes used for chorus parts. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is composed of only five pitches. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. WerckMeister/KirnBerger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Equal 88 CLP-990 NO C YES D I b I b b C, C , D, E , E, F, F , G, A , A, B , B Setting range: Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] D Setting range: Normal setting: B B NO C A This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth] This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off YES D Other settings Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe rotor pedal. See the procedure on page 72. A TIP If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Voice Setting menu (pages 81 and 82) is disabled. See the procedure on page 72. B NO Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/ Pause] YES A B NO C C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off. Left, Middle, AUX Setting range: On/Off This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”). See the procedure on page 72. A D Setting for: Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] B NO C YES D YES D Normal setting: Off for all pedals Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 72. Setting range: PianoLike, Normal A B NO Normal setting: YES PianoLike C D Setting range: Make, Break CLP-990 89 Other settings Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 31) starts working. This setting is effective when the right pedal function (page 81) is set to either SustainCont or Sustain. See the procedure on page 72. A C The CLP-990 provides the XG tone generator for the purpose of playing GM, XG, or DOC music data (page 60). You can replace some XG voices with the preset voices on the panel for playback. This parameter enables you to select “Native” (using the preset voices) or “XG” (using the XG voices). See the procedure on page 72. A B NO Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative] B NO YES C D YES D Select the desired item. Select on or off. Setting range: –2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective with the deepest press) Setting for: All preset voices on the panel Setting range: Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange] Native Using the preset voices XG Using the XG voices Normal setting: This parameter enables you to set the range of continuous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function. • This parameter is effective only on the keyboard performance sound. • You can set the range in semitone steps. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO C YES D Setting range: –12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) Normal setting: –2 90 CLP-990 GrandPiano1 Other voices Native XG (using the preset voices) (using the XG voices) Other settings Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. • Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 56) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 72. A B NO You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. • The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File menu does not change. • The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. • You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 72. Reset the Clavinova. YES A C Select the desired item. B NO D YES Select on or off. Setting for: Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/ LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBalance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting Setting range: C D Select a value for memory songs. Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are kept. Memory songs are erased. On/Off Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSetting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and black key (Bb6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. B 6 B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO YES SPLIT POINT EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT POWER C7 [POWER] CLP-990 91 Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message Meaning This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/ Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can proceed to the next step. Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again. The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 86) or “VoiceBulkDump” (page 86) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button. This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. Writing or reading data from the disk has failed. Try again. If you still see this message, the disk may be damaged or the disk drive may have malfunction. If you see this message while using a brand new disk, it is more likely that the disk drive is malfunctioning. Ask your Yamaha dealer for repair. The floppy disk space is full and can no longer record data. Use a new disk (page 53) or delete unnecessary files from the disk (page 53) to make room for new data. You attempted to eject a floppy disk from the disk drive while the drive was writing or reading. The writing or reading operation is not complete yet. Try it again. 92 CLP-990 Message List Message Meaning You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page 54), “SaveToMemory” (page 52), or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parameter), but a song with the same name already exists in memory or on the floppy disk. Three seconds after this message appears, the previous screen is restored. Rename the song. This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 91). The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 91) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and Bb6 keys and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 91). The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous screen. In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy source disk has not been inserted to the disk drive. Insert the disk. In the CopyDisk operation (page 55), the copy destination disk has not been inserted into the disk drive. Insert the disk. You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power. The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the storage memory as much as possible. CLP-990 93 Message List Message Meaning This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted. There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Save songs to a floppy disk (page 53) or delete some songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory. A floppy disk has not been inserted into the disk drive for a disk-related operation. Insert the disk and continue. You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory or on disk. You cannot delete the song. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. 1. You tried to write, copy, or delete data on a disk that has its “write protect” tab on, or a disk that is internally protected against writing. Set the protect tab to off (unprotected) (page 14) and try again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk. 2. This message also appears when you try to copy data on an internallyprotected disk onto another disk using the CopyDisk function (page 55). You cannot duplicate such a disk. You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such files. 94 CLP-990 Message List Message Meaning 1. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a floppy disk. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to such a disk. 2. This message also appears if you try to transmit bulk data (page 86) of an internally-protected song (such as commercially available music data). You cannot transmit bulk data of such songs. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory or a floppy disk. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 52) or “SaveToDisk” (page 53) parameter screen. If necessary, select “SaveToMemory” or “SaveToDisk” accordingly and save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation. The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song. Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data may be damaged. The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops automatically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional recording but the song data already fills the Current memory. In this case, you cannot make an additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parameter (page 75) to delete unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in memory. The size of the selected song is larger than the Current memory (page 97). The CLP-990 cannot read the song. Select another song. This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. CLP-990 95 Message List Message Meaning This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector. When you are using the CLP-990 with a connected computer: The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incorrectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the CLP-990 and the computer, then check the cable connections and the [HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer and the CLP-990 in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI application on the computer work properly. When you are using only the CLP-990: This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on the CLP-990. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-990, remove the cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP-990. If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP-990 may not work correctly. You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted disk. Eject the disk, format it using the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 56), and try again. You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted disk. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 56). You tried to copy data to a different type of disk (e.x.: 2DD →2HD, 2HD→2DD) during the CopyDisk operation (page 55). Eject the disk and insert an appropriate disk. You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-990, and the CLP-990 could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. 96 CLP-990 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/ CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press one of the SONG SELECT [ buttons once. ] and [ ] ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording track is selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. Track data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 48). Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. ■ What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the tracks: • Note data (notes you play) • Voice selection • Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off • Reverb depth “ReverbSend” • Chorus depth “ChorusSend” • Variation effect depth “VariationSend” • Voice octave setting “Octave” • Voice volume level “Volume” • Stereo image of each voice “Pan” • Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode) “Detune” • Volume level changes for each voice with response to the way you play “TouchSense” Data recorded globally in all tracks: • Tempo • Time signature • Reverb type • Chorus type • Variation effect type You can change all data except for note data after recording. You can change the time signature at the beginning of the song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped. CLP-990 97 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ I cannot change the key signature in the song after recording. Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the measure in which you wish to change the key signature, then change it. ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 50): About 600KB • Storage memory (page 50): About 750KB • 2DD floppy disk (page 13): about 720KB • 2HD floppy disk (page 13): about 1.4MB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 89) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to change the external pedal setting. 98 CLP-990 ■ The song title is not correct. The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 56) in the FILE menu to change the setting. However, if the song was recorded on another instrument, changing the “CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve the problem. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclusive data (that controls the tone generator) to be output. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity data to be output. Appendix CLP-990 99 Troubleshooting Problem The Clavinova does not turn on. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. The pitch and/or tone of the piano voices in certain ranges do not sound right. Mechanical noise is heard during performance. 100 CLP-990 Cause The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low. Headphones are connected. The Local Control function is turned off. The Clavinova’s piano voices attempt to precisely simulate actual piano sounds. However, as a result of sampling algorithms, overtones in some ranges may sound exaggerated, producing a somewhat different pitch or tone. The Clavinova’s keyboard mechanism simulates the keyboard mechanism of a piano. Mechanical noise is also heard on a piano. Solution Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. (See page 19.) This is normal, and is no cause for concern. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level. (See page 20.) Unplug the headphones. (See page 20.) Turn the Local Control function on. (See page 85.) This is normal. This is normal. Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CLP-990, and whether or not the CLP-990 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Basic Check Points Sequence Format The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below. • Disk Format • Sequence format • Voice allocation format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” • Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. [Common Sequence Formats] Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of saving data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • CLP-990 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the CLP-990, a 2DD disk saves up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk saves up to 1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. • Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CLP-990 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks). • Performance data recorded on the CLP-990 is saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The CLP-990 is compatible with ESEQ. CLP-990 101 Data Compatibility Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” • Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. [Main Voice Allocation Formats] ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. • The CLP-990 is compatible with GM System Level 1. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. • The CLP-990 is compatible with XG. • Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-990 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. ■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also common format used with various Yamaha software. The CLP-990 is compatible with DOC. • Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. 102 CLP-990 Preset Voice List Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ● This voice has been sampled from a full concert grand piano. It features five-stage dynamic sampling, tone changes with damper pedal operation, and a subtle voicing at the release of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic piano sound. It also reproduces a string resonance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This voice is suitable not only for classical music but for piano music of any genre. GrandPiano2 ● ● × × × A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal for rock and popular genres. E.Piano1 ● ● ● × × An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. E.Piano2 × ● ● ● × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. SynthPiano × ● × × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. WoodBass ● ● ● ● × This voice simulates the sound of an upright bass played with the fingers, and is suitable for jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has improved the acoustic feel. ElectricBass × ● ● × × Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. Bass&Cymbal ● ● ● × × WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal sound are layered. This voice is very effective for a jazz walking bass. Harpsichord8' ● × × ● × The harpsichord is often used for Baroque music. The volume level is always consistent regardless of how you play. The instrument generates a peculiar voice when you release the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same octave sound as the keys. Harpsichord8'+4' ● × × ● × This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound one octave higher than the actual keys. × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. × This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet. The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the “VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off. ElectricClavichord Vibraphone × ● ● ● × ● ● × CLP-990 103 Preset Voice List Voice name Marimba Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description ● ● ● × × This voice simulates a concert-type marimba sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real acoustic spread. Celesta ● ● ● × × A celesta is a percussive instrument. When you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a metallic board to produce the sound. This instrument is famous for the impressive sound in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nutcracker Suite by Tchaikovsky. PipeOrganPrincipal ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4') of a flute (woodwind instrument) organ. Its soft sound is suitable for the accompaniment of hymns. PipeOrganFlute1 104 Stereo sampling ● × × × PipeOrganFlute2 ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+1 1/3') of a flute organ. It sounds more brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable for solo performance. PipeOrganTutti ● × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. JazzOrgan × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. Strings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble that accurately simulates all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin. SynthStrings ● ● × × × Sampled strings, processed for spread and warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in ensemble music. SlowStrings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Choir ● ● × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir ● ● × × × This voice features a chorus sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Scat ● ● ● × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. CLP-990 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs MAIN + MAIN This combination is often used in popular music. This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. This is suitable for romantic ballads. This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. Split MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. Dual + Split MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (pages 79 and 80) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This combination makes a very brilliant sound. CLP-990 105 Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. Numerics D J 50 greats for the Clavinova 15 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Practicing a one-hand part 28 Damper (right) pedal 31 Data Compatibility 101 Data type 59 Default (Normal) setting* 32 Demonstration tunes 24 Detailed Settings 70 Metronome 77 MIDI 83 Other settings 87 recording and playback 74 voices 78 Disk Copy 55 Format 56 Disk song 50 Display contrast 20 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 40 Dual Detailed settings 78 Recording 49 Dual mode → combining two voices 35 Jacks AUX IN 62 AUX OUT 61 AUX PEDAL 62 PHONES 20 TO HOST 62, 64 A Adding reverberation to the sound → REVERB 33 Adding variation to the sound → Effect function 32 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal 89 AUX IN jacks 62 AUX OUT jacks 61 AUX PEDAL jacks 62 Auxiliary pedal function 82 B BackUp 91 Bench 15 BRILLIANCE 32 C Center pedal 31 Center pedal function 82 Character Code 56 Characters 56 CHORUS 33 combining two voices → Dual mode 35 computer 63 Connection Audio 61 MIDI 66 Other Components 61 Serial 64 Speaker 62 USB 67 Connectors MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 63, 66 CONTRAST 20 E Effect function 32 EXIT 23 EXTRA TRACKS → the third or more tracks 46 F FactorySet 91 Fast forward 27, 58 FILE 50 Floppy Disk 13, 14 Formatting a floppy disk 56 H Headphones 20 HOST SELECT switch 62 L LCD → Display Contrast 20 LCD → Screen 23 Left pedal 31 Left pedal function 82 LEFT voice group buttons 37 List Demonstration tunes 24 Detailed Settings 70 Message 92 Preset Voice 103 M MAIN voice group buttons 30 Maintenance 14 MASTER VOLUME 20 Memory 50 Memory song 50 MemoryBackUp 91 Message List 92 Metronome 40 Detailed settings 77 METRONOME SETTING 77 MIDI 83 Detailed settings 83 MIDI cables 66 MIDI connectors 63, 66 MIDI driver 64 MIDI SETTING 83 Music Data 57 Music stand 18 N New Song 41 Normal setting* 32 106 CLP-990 Index O S Other settings 87 Scale 88 Screen 23 Select 50 piano preset songs 26 Demo Songs 24 Recorded Songs and Music Data 57 Selecting a touch response 87 SETTING metronome 77 Volume 20 SMF (Standard MIDI File) 101 Soft (left) pedal 31 Song Data Type 59 Delete 53 Detailed settings 74 Playing back repeatedly 76 Rename 54 Store 50 Store (Floopy disk) 53 Store (Storage memory) 53 SONG BALANCE 48 SONG SELECT 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recorded Songs and Music Data 57 Recording 41 SONG SETTING 74 Sostenuto (center) pedal 31 Sound brilliance 32 expression 32 reverberation 33 spread and spaciousness 33 Soundboard reverb 33 Split Detailed settings 78 Recording 49 Split mode → playing two voices 37 Split point 38 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 37 START/PAUSE 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Recording 42 START/STOP metronome 40 P Pedal Function Auxiliary 82 Center 82 Left 82 Right 81 Pedals 31 Personal computer 63 PHONES jacks 20 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Demo Songs 24 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Playing back repeatedly (song) 76 Playing back repeatedly (specifying the range) 75 playing two voices → Split mode 37 POWER 19 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) 28 PRECAUTIONS 3 Preset song memory 50 Preset Voice List 103 R Recording Tape Recorder 61 Recording in Dual 49 Recording in Split 49 Recording Your Performance 41 Re-recording 43 REVERB 33 Rewind 27, 58 Right pedal 31 Right pedal function 81 STOP 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Recording 42 Storage memory 50 StringResonance 88 SustainSampling 88 Synchro Start 50 preset songs 28 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 40 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 the third or more tracks → EXTRA TRACKS 46 TO HOST jack 62, 64 TouchResponse 87 Track playback on and off 59 TRACK1/TRACK2 50 Piano Preset Songs 28 Recording 41, 45 TRANSPOSE 34 Transposition 34 Troubleshooting 100 Tune 87 Type of characters 56 Type of data (recorded) 97 U UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 40 V VOICE SETTING 78 Voices 30 Detailed settings 78 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) 48 Setting 20 X XG 102 CLP-990 107 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 PHILIPPINES DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [CL] 21 Clavinova Web Site (English only) http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2001 Yamaha Corporation V?????? ???AP?????.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/